Screen Service Broadcasting Technologies SDTX-ARK6 20 Watt Multimode SDR Transmitter User Manual Software
Screen Service Broadcasting Technologies SpA 20 Watt Multimode SDR Transmitter Software
User Manual
| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 1671799 |
| Application ID | ijBlLaUPVwRKAo5MCpvvbg== |
| Document Description | User Manual |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 386.46kB (4830761 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2012-04-09 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2012-06-07 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2012-03-21 14:18:09 |
| Producing Software | Microsoft® Office Word 2007 |
| Document Lastmod | 2012-03-21 14:18:09 |
| Document Title | Software User Manual |
| Document Creator | Microsoft® Office Word 2007 |
| Document Author: | C. Di Biase |
ISO 9001:2000
Cert. N°4500/1
Software User Manual
ARK6
External Document
Document name: SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Document code: ARK6-UM-000
Author: C. Di Biase
Date: September 23rd, 2011
Version: 1.1
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table of Contents
Document structure ............................................................................................................... 5
Scope of the document .......................................................................................................... 6
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 7
3.1
Digitizer features .............................................................................................................. 9
3.2
Satellite receivers features............................................................................................... 9
3.2.1
DVB-S/S2 .................................................................................................................. 9
3.2.2
DVB-S/S2 plus CAM ............................................................................................... 10
3.3
Terrestrial receivers features ......................................................................................... 11
3.3.1
3.4
ATSC ....................................................................................................................... 11
ITU Transmitter features ................................................................................................ 12
3.4.1
ITU Features........................................................................................................... 12
3.4.2
ITU Signal Processing ............................................................................................. 13
3.5
ATSC Transmitter features ............................................................................................. 14
3.5.1
ATSC Features ........................................................................................................ 14
3.5.2
ATSC Signal Processing .......................................................................................... 14
3.6
System Features ............................................................................................................. 15
3.7
Synchronization .............................................................................................................. 15
Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 16
4.1
Input Interfaces .............................................................................................................. 16
4.2
Output Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 19
4.3
Control Interfaces........................................................................................................... 22
4.3.1
RS232 pinout ......................................................................................................... 23
4.3.2
TLC pinout .............................................................................................................. 23
4.3.3
TLS pinout .............................................................................................................. 24
4.4
Power Supply.................................................................................................................. 25
4.5
Environmental Specification .......................................................................................... 27
4.6
Mechanical Specification................................................................................................ 27
Java Graphic User Interface ................................................................................................. 28
5.1
Authentication Option ................................................................................................... 28
5.2
Java Menu Bar ................................................................................................................ 29
5.3
Home Page ..................................................................................................................... 31
5.4
Input ............................................................................................................................... 32
5.5
Front-End........................................................................................................................ 37
5.5.1
Version 1.1
Tuner window: RF power level monitor ................................................................ 38
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 2 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.5.2
DIGITIZER FE Type .................................................................................................. 39
5.5.3
ATSC FE Type ......................................................................................................... 41
5.6
ATSC ............................................................................................................................... 44
5.6.1
ATSC Settings ......................................................................................................... 45
5.6.2
ATSC Modulation ................................................................................................... 49
5.6.3
ATSC TVCT.............................................................................................................. 51
5.6.4
ATSC Measure........................................................................................................ 52
5.7
ITU.470 ........................................................................................................................... 54
5.7.1
ITU Settings ............................................................................................................ 55
5.7.2
ITU Modulation...................................................................................................... 59
5.8
Manual compensation ................................................................................................... 66
5.8.1
Linear Precorrection .............................................................................................. 66
5.8.2
Non Linear Precorrection ...................................................................................... 68
5.8.3
Port 5000 connection ............................................................................................ 69
5.9
Adaptive compensation ................................................................................................. 70
5.9.1
Linear Adaptive Precorrection ............................................................................... 70
5.9.2
Adaptive Non-Linear Precorrection ....................................................................... 74
5.10
Output ............................................................................................................................ 76
5.10.1
Reflex Power Management ................................................................................... 85
5.11
Network.......................................................................................................................... 87
5.12
GPS ................................................................................................................................. 92
5.12.1
Holdover Management ......................................................................................... 94
5.13
Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 99
5.14
Events ........................................................................................................................... 116
5.14.1
Date and Time Setting ......................................................................................... 126
5.14.2
Task Error Event................................................................................................... 126
5.14.3
System Error Event .............................................................................................. 127
5.14.4
System Initialization Event .................................................................................. 128
5.15
System menu ................................................................................................................ 131
5.15.1
File Menu ............................................................................................................. 131
5.15.2
View Menu........................................................................................................... 132
5.15.3
Help Menu ........................................................................................................... 135
5.16
Download Software Standalone................................................................................... 137
Local User Interface ........................................................................................................... 138
6.1
Version 1.1
Boot and Welcome Message ....................................................................................... 139
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 3 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
6.2
Idle Menu ..................................................................................................................... 140
6.3
Main Menu ................................................................................................................... 141
6.4
LCD Alarms ................................................................................................................... 142
SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol............................................................... 144
7.1
SNMP Protocol Preferences ......................................................................................... 145
7.2
Monitoring ................................................................................................................... 146
7.3
Events Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 181
7.4
Configuring alarm masks and alarm thresholds........................................................... 182
7.4.1
Alarms Table ........................................................................................................ 182
7.4.2
Thresholds Table.................................................................................................. 185
7.5
Traps ............................................................................................................................. 188
7.5.1
SNMPv1 ............................................................................................................... 188
7.5.2
SNMPv2 ............................................................................................................... 190
7.5.3
Configuring traps ................................................................................................. 192
Appendix A.
Automatic input source selection methods ........................................................ 193
A.1
Input Autoswitch .......................................................................................................... 193
A.2
Seamless input switching ............................................................................................. 196
Appendix B.
B.1
Ethernet connection..................................................................................................... 197
B.1.1
B.2
Java Virtual Machine ........................................................................................... 197
Configuration ....................................................................................................... 197
Java(TM) Platform ........................................................................................................ 197
B.2.1
Download ............................................................................................................ 197
B.2.2
Java Control Panel ............................................................................................... 197
B.3
Supported Web Browsers ............................................................................................ 197
Appendix C.
C.1
How to update.............................................................................................................. 198
Appendix D.
Version 1.1
Application Note .................................................................................................. 198
Document versions .............................................................................................. 203
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 4 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
1 Document structure
This ARK6 User Manual has the following chapters and appendices:
Chapter 1 – Document structure.
Chapter 2 – Scope of the document.
Chapter 3 – Introduction
This chapter contains an overview of ARK6 and its features.
Chapter 4 – Specifications
This chapter lists the ARK6 specifications.
Chapter 5 – Java remote graphic user interface.
This chapter describes the Java interface provided for board managing.
Chapter 6 – Local user interface.
This chapter describes the local user interface provided for board managing.
Chapter 7 – SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
This chapter describes the SNMP interface provided for board managing.
Appendix A – Java Virtual Machine.
Appendix with all instruction needed to manage Java Virtual Machine.
Appendix B – Application Note.
Appendix with all instructions needed to update ARK6 devices.
Appendix C – Document versions.
Appendix with additional information, the present document versions.
Appendix D – List of Tables.
Appendix E – List of Figures.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 5 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
2 Scope of the document
Purpose of this document is to provide a comprehensive description of the functionalities of the SDT
Series ARK-6 and to provide operating information on the software elements of the ARK6 system.
SDT ARK6 User Manual provides software setup information and includes an overview of Java, SNMP
and Local user interfaces.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 6 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3 Introduction
The SDT ARK-6 Series has been designed as a brand new model of software defined transmitters which
incorporate all the technical and functional capabilities of the previous models of the ARK-1 family (ARK1, ARK-R, ARK-T, ARK-ATSC, ECHO-2) together with a complete set of new functionalities that bring the
transmitter at the forefront of the technology edge.
The New SDT ARK-6 Series is the result of years of research and represents the state of the art of the
worldwide transmitter technology. We call it UNIVERSAL DRIVER because of its incredible capability to
modulate in all schemes, just uploading a proper software package. It is perfect for both international
broadcasters which have business in several countries to increase manageability of investment through
reduction of transmitter types and national broadcasters, due for its versatility in operation modes and
configuration. In fact it can be used as a Transmitter, an Heterodyne Transposer, a Regenerative
Transposer and Single Frequency Echo Canceller (proper to Single Frequency Networks), all in a single
hardware.
ARK-6 UNIVERSAL DRIVER is resilient to future evolutions of technology and standardization: this
platform guarantees a perfect upgrade path for new modulation schemes that the researchers will
delivery. Besides ARK-6 UNIVERSAL DRIVER already implements DVB-T/T2, PAL, ATSC/MH, NTSC, ISDB-T
modulations. The SDT ARK-6 allows selection of transmission modes in various ways: remotely, using a
dry contact; via SNMP commands; via TCP/IP, using the Web graphic interface; or even via a dedicated
command inserted into the transport stream. Functional interfaces are available for total remote control
of the apparatus by means of serial protocols or TCP/IP ports. Thanks to the internal Web server the
apparatus can be easily monitored and configured and updated using a LAN connection and a standard
Web browser. Moreover, the built-in SNMP agent allows full automated remote control.
Based on Software Defined Technology, ARK-6 allows the definition of different operative modes on the
same hardware platform. A single software controller allows the ARK-6 to be loaded with up to five
working modes simultaneously and to switch between them preserving each mode-specific
configuration.
The SDT ARK-6 Series specifications can be found in chapter 4.
A brief description of the main features and potentialities of each operative mode follows in next
paragraphs.
The following table shows all the allowed hardware configurations.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 7 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 1.
Hardware options
Modulation
Front-End
None
DVB-S/S2
DVB-S/S2 + CAM
DVB-T/T2
DVB-T/H
DVB-T2
ISDBT
ATSC
ITU
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
Transmitter
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
with DVB-S/S2 RF input
(with CAM)
(with CAM)
(with CAM)
(with CAM)
Regenerative Transposer
Regenerative Transposer
Heterodyne Transposer
Heterodyne Transposer
Echo Canceller
Echo Canceller
Transmitter with decoded
DVBS2 RX input
Regenerative Transposer
ISDBT
Heterodyne Transposer
Echo Canceller
Regenerative Transposer
ATSC
Heterodyne Transposer
Echo Canceller
DIGITALIZER
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Transmitter
with A/V analog inputs
Page 8 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.1 Digitizer features
Supports the A/D conversion and decoding of NTSC and PAL CVBS inputs
Supports 2 CVBS video and 2 L/R audio inputs
Adaptive 2-D, 5-line, adaptive comb filter
Automatic video standard detection (NTSC/PAL)
Automatic video standard switching
Luma-peaking with programmable gain
3.2 Satellite receivers features
3.2.1 DVB-S/S2
Input DVB-S and DVB-S2 demodulator that conforms to ETSI EN 300 421 and ETSI TR 102 376
respectively.
Dual multi standard demodulation:
Legacy DVBS and DirecTVTM QPSK
DVBS2 QPSK, 8PSK, 16 and 32APSK
Multi-tap equalizer for RF reflection removal
Wide range carrier frequency tracking loop for offset recovery
Dual multi standard decoding:
DVBS or DirecTVTM legacy
DVBS2 FEC and framing
Up to 190 Mbit/s channel bit rate
Bit error rate monitoring
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 9 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.2.2 DVB-S/S2 plus CAM
Input DVB-S and DVB-S2 demodulator that conforms to ETSI EN 300 421 and ETSI TR 102 376
respectively.
Dual multi standard demodulation:
Legacy DVBS and DirecTVTM QPSK
DVBS2 QPSK, 8PSK, 16 and 32APSK
Multi-tap equalizer for RF reflection removal
Wide range carrier frequency tracking loop for offset recovery
Dual multi standard decoding:
DVBS or DirecTVTM legacy
DVBS2 FEC and framing
Up to 190 Mbit/s channel bit rate
Bit error rate monitoring
DVB common interface compliant
H.264/AVC Level 4.1 high profile video decoder
MPEG-2 HD/SD video decoder MP@HL
Programmable audio decoder supporting: MPEG1 layer 1, 2 and 3 (MP3), Dolby Digital, AAC LC
4 transport stream decoders and DVB descramblers
Teletext / WSS / PDC / CC / VBID insertion
Cross Colour / Cross Luminance Filters
PAL/NTSC/SECAM digital encoder
ITU-R 656 video input & output
Analog HD output via YPrPb
S/P-DIF output for PCM / MPEG / Dolby Digital 5.1
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 10 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.3 Terrestrial receivers features
3.3.1 ATSC
Agile VHF/UHF input Down-conversion (from 50.5 MHz up to 862 MHz)
Input adjustable offset frequencies: from -200 kHz to +200 kHz (1 Hz step)
Input ATSC demodulator that conforms to the ATSC A/53 standard
8VSB demodulator including a highly efficient adaptive equalizer
Excellent performance under static and dynamic multi-path environment
Fully A-74 and NTIA/CECB compliant
Dual AGC for optimal RF versus IF gain control
Fully-integrated digital channel filter reduces external IF circuitry to single SAW filter and VGA
Incorporates SNR monitor and BER monitor
Input RF signal level monitoring
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 11 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.4 ITU Transmitter features
The ARK-6 ITU is an ITU-R BT.470-6 compliant Transmitter. The key features of the ARK-6 ITU are:
Standard SDI inputs (SMPTE 259M-C – Component 4:2:2);
Agile UHF output Up-converter (from 470 MHz up to 862 MHz). The VHF option is also available.
Output adjustable offset frequencies: from -200 kHz to +200 kHz (1 Hz step).
3.4.1 ITU Features
Inputs
4 SDI, 2 CVBS (optional) and 2 L/R (optional)
Supported SDI Standard
SMPTE 259M-C – Component 4:2:2
270Mb/s for 525 and 625 lines, 13.5 MHz sampling, 4x3
and 16x9 aspect ratios.
Outputs
1 RF, 1 RF Monitor
2 SDI for inputs bypass
Test modes
CW, CW AV, Mute Audio Carrier, Mute Audio, Audio Test
Tone, Video In, SMPTE Bars, Horizontal Bars, Red Field,
ITS0, ITS1, ITS2, ITS3 and ITS4.
Pre-correction
Linear Compensation
Non-Linear Compensation
Redundancy
Version 1.1
Input autoswitch algorithm supported
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 12 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.4.2 ITU Signal Processing
Digital audio channels presence and level monitoring.
Analog audio sampling rate fixed to 48 kHz.
Input redundancy provided by an input autoswitch algorithm based on primary feed presence (SDI
and CVBS).
Selectable Group Delay curve.
Selectable Audio Type.
Selectable Sound System.
Selectable Emphasis.
Adjustable Audio Deviation and Carriers Level.
Adjustable White Level, Synchronism Amplitude and Pedes Level.
Non-Linear Precorrection.
Linear Precorrection.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 13 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.5 ATSC Transmitter features
The ARK-6 ATSC is an A/53 and A/153 compliant Transmitter. The key features of the ARK-6 ATSC are:
SMPTE-310M with 19.39 Mbps, DVB-ASI (EN-50083/9) and Gigabit Ethernet (PRO-MPEG
COP3 R2) inputs;
Agile UHF output Up-converter (from 470 MHz up to 862 MHz). The VHF option is also
available.
Output adjustable offset frequencies: from -200 kHz to +200 kHz (1 Hz step).
3.5.1 ATSC Features
Inputs
4 ASI, 2 TSoIP channels and 1 RF(optional)
Outputs
1 RF, 1 RF Monitor
2 ASI and 2 TSoIP channels for inputs bypass
Test modes
CW, Force Null Packets
Monitoring
Output signal level and quality monitoring
Pre-correction
Adaptive Linear Compensation
Adaptive Non-Linear Compensation
Redundancy
Input autoswitch algorithm supported
3.5.2 ATSC Signal Processing
Input stream monitoring
On-The-Fly substitution of Major and Minor channel numbers in the TVCT for user selectable ones.
PCR restamping
Null packets deletion
Bit rate adaptation through Null packets insertion
M/H mode supported
M/H Regenerative mode up to 8 M/H number of groups supported
User selectable input autoswitch criteria based on primary feed quality (RF, ASI and TSoIP)
Linear and Non-Linear Adaptive Precorrections
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 14 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.6 System Features
Synchronization
External or GPS
Internal clock
Oven Controlled OCXO oscillator (10 MHz and 1 PPS)
Output clock
1 PPS and 10 MHz
Management
Embedded SNMP v1 server
Embedded Web server
GbE Ports
GbE 1: 10/100/1000 Base T Management port
GbE 2: 10/100/1000 Base T Data port
Security
Authentication for GUI access supported.
3.7 Synchronization
The ARK6 includes a holdover function provided by a higher grade Oven-Controlled Crystal Oscillator.
The ARK6 is equipped with an internal OCXO for improved phase noise and stability. The system is
provided with internal 10MHz and 1PPS signals which are disciplined to the GPS time signal or to the
10MHz and 1PPS external references. The stability of internal frequency and phase is assured by the
highly stable OCXO. If the satellites signal, from the GPS receiver, or the external reference sources are
completely lost, the Holdover mode enables the unit to keep working with internal 10MHz and 1PPS for
the duration of the Holdover Timeout, with very low drift over time.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 15 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4 Specifications
4.1 Input Interfaces
ASI/SSI/SDI
Number of inputs
Connector
BNC
Zin
75 Ohm
Input voltage
800 mVpp (500 to 1200 mVpp)
Supported standards
CEI EN 50083-9
SMPTE 310M
SMPTE 259M
TSoIP
Number of channels
Connector
RJ45
Speed
10/100/1000
RF
Number of inputs
Connector
N female
Frequency
UHF (VHF optional)
Level
-76 dB to -16 dB
Zin
50 Ohm
Supported standards
It depends on the FE Type.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 16 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
CVBS
Number of inputs
Connector
BNC
Zin
75 Ohm
Input Voltage
1 Vpp
Supported standards
PAL
NTSC
Analog Audio
Number of inputs
2 L/R
Connector
XLR3 (Cannon f)
Zin
600 Ohm balanced
Input level
+6dBm +/- 6 dB
Supported standards
EIA RF-297-A
GPS
Number of inputs
Connector
TNC
Zin
50 Ohm
Sensitivity
-185dBW
10 MHz
Number of inputs
Connector
BNC
Zin
50 Ohm
Input voltage
2 Vpp
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 17 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
1PPS
Number of inputs
Connector
BNC
Zin
50 Ohm
Input voltage
TTL (min 1,7 V)
Pulse width
100 us
Linear Precorrection
Number of inputs
Connector
SMA
Zin
50 Ohm
Input level
-20 to +11,5 dBm
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 18 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4.2 Output Interfaces
RF
Number of outputs
Connector
N Female
Frequency
UHF (VHF optional)
Zout
50 Ohm
Spectrum polarity
Non-inverted (inverted optional)
Harmonic and spurious
<-50dBm below 1 GHz
Digital
Level
SDTx200: 18 to 38 dBm
SDTx500: 21 to 41 dBm
SDTx201:
SDTx501: 36 to 56 dBm
SDTx501-ATSC: 38 to 58 dBm
Spectrum outside band
+/-3,8 MHz: 0 dB
+/-4,25 MHz: < 46 dB
+/-5,25 MHz: < 56 dB
MER
SDTx500/200/201: > 38 dB
SDTx501: >36 dB
Analog
Level
SDTx200: 24 to 44 dBm
SDTx500: 28 to 48 dBm
SDTx201:
SDTx501: 40 to 60 dBm
RF Output Reverberate Loss
≥13dB
Video Modulation Degree
87.5%
Video Flatness
±1.0dB
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 19 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
TSoIP
Number of channels
Connector
RJ45
Speed
10/100/1000
Standard
PRO-MPEG COP3 R2
ASI Out Monitor
Number of outputs
Connector
BNC
Zout
75 Ohm
Output voltage
800 mVpp (500 to 1200 mVpp)
Supported standards
CEI EN 50083-9
SMPTE 310M
SMPTE 259M
RF Mon
Number of outputs
Connector
SMA
Frequency
UHF (VHF optional)
Level
-40 dBm RF Out
Zout
50 Ohm
10 MHz
Number of outputs
Connector
SMB
Zout
50 Ohm
Output voltage
2 Vpp
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 20 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
1PPS
Number of outputs
Connector
SMB
Zout
50 Ohm
Output voltage
TTL (min 2,4 V)
Pulse width
100 us
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 21 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4.3 Control Interfaces
GbE 1
RS485
Number of interfaces
Number of interfaces
Connector
RJ45
Connector
DB9
Speed
10/100/1000
Type
CAM BUS
(Not available)
OPTO
Relays
Number of outputs
Number of outputs
Connector
SUB-D 15p Female
Connector
SUB-D 25p Female
Max current
-5 mA
Max voltage
125VAC / 60VDC @
0,3A – 30VDC @ 1A
RS232
Number of interfaces
Connector
DB9
Speed
Up to 230400 bps
Data
8-bit data
Parity
No parity bits
Flow control
None
Stop
1 stop bit
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 22 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4.3.1 RS232 pinout
Usually personal computers use a standard RS 232 DE-9 connector.
Figure 1.
DE-9 Male connector
Table 2.
RS232 DE-9 pinout
DE-9 Pin
Name
Direction
Description
RXD
Receive Data
TXD
Transmit Data
GND
System Ground
4.3.2 TLC pinout
ARK6 has a SUB-D 15p Female connector for OPTOs with customized pin assignments.
Figure 2.
Table 3.
Version 1.1
TLC connector
TLC pinout
Pin
Signal
IN_OPTO_0
Pin
Signal
O_GND_0
IN_OPTO_1
10
O_GND_1
IN_OPTO_2
11
O_GND_2
IN_OPTO_3
12
O_GND_3
OPTO_GND
13
OPTO_GND
VCC_P
14
VCC_P
GND
15
GND
NC
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 23 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4.3.3 TLS pinout
ARK6 has a SUB-D 25p Female connector for Relays with customized pin assignments.
Figure 3.
Table 4.
Version 1.1
TLS connector
TLS pinout
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
RL_NC0
14
RL0_NC0
RL_COM0
15
RL0_COM0
RL_NO0
16
RL0_NO0
RL_NC1
17
RL1_NC1
RL_COM1
18
RL1_COM1
RL_NO1
19
RL1_NO1
RL_NC2
20
RL2_NC2
RL_COM2
21
RL2_COM2
RL_NO2
22
RL2_NO2
10
RL_NC3
23
RL3_NC3
11
RL_COM3
24
RL3_COM3
12
RL_NO3
25
RL3_NO3
13
NC
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 24 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4.4 Power Supply
IEC
Voltage
80 – 264 VAC
Frequency
50 – 60 Hz
ARK6 1U Mains Consumption [Test on ch. 21]
MODE
PWR [dBm]
Vac [Volt]
Iac[Amp]
Consumption [W]
ST-BY
225
0,35
78,8
Power OFF
225
0,40
90,0
Power ON
21
225
0,62
139,5
Power ON
31
225
0,64
144,0
Power ON
37
225
0,71
159,8
Power ON
41
225
0,80
180,0
ARK6 2U Mains Consumption [Test on ch. 21]
MODE
PWR [dBm]
Vac [Volt]
Iac[Amp]
Consumption [W]
ST-BY
225
0,35
78,8
Power OFF
225
0,40
90,0
Power ON
40
225
1.9
425
Power ON
47
225
2.9
650
Power ON
50
225
3.7
830
Power ON
52
225
4.4
990
Power ON
53 (1)
225
4.9
1100
Note to the table:
(1) If required.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 25 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
ARK6 3U Mains Consumption [Test on ch. 45]
MODE
PWR [dBm]
Vac [Volt]
Iac[Amp]
Consumption [W]
ST-BY
225
0,35
78,8
Power OFF
225
0,40
90,0
Power ON
43
225
2.8
630
Power ON
50
225
4.5
1010
Power ON
53
225
5.7
1280
Power ON
55
225
6.8
1530
Power ON
56 (1)
225
7.4
1660
Note to the table:
(1) If required.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 26 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4.5 Environmental Specification
Climatic Temperature range operating
0 °C to +40 °C (+32 °F to +104 °F)
Temperature range within specs
+5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F to +113 °F)
Temperature range storage
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to +158 °F)
Humidity operating
max 90% RH
EMC
Compliant to EN50022 (emission)
and EN55024 (immunity)
Safety
Compliant to EN60950-1
RoHs
Compliant with directive 2002/95/EC
4.6 Mechanical Specification
Cabinet
19” wide, 1RU high
Width
19” (483 mm)
Height
1U: 44 mm (1.75”)
2U: 88 mm (3.5”)
3U: 132mm (5.25”)
Cooling
Long life fans to assist natural
convection
Transport and storage
Version 1.1
Vibration acc. to IEC Publ.68
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 27 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5 Java Graphic User Interface
The Java Graphic User Interface, stored in the board File System, is downloaded to the local PC every
time the user connects to the board with a Web Browser. A proper Java Virtual Machine is needed; refer
to the Appendix B for a description of supported Java and Internet Browsers.
5.1 Authentication Option
In order to prevent unauthorized users from accessing ARK6 devices via Java Graphic User Interface, an
authentication mechanism can be enabled by means of a factory setting. The name/password
credentials provide control only over who can open the GUI, and requires that all users know a single
name/password to access it.
If the authentication mechanism is set for the GUI access, operators will be prompted to enter User
Name and Password before they can have read/write access. The following figure shows the window
that appears as soon as an operator tries to access the Java GUI.
Figure 4.
GUI - Login
Enter your User Name and Password and then click “OK” in order to log in.
The default factory login credentials are:
User name: “screen”
Password: “0000”
Use the Change Password tab to change your credentials.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 28 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.2 Java Menu Bar
The following figure shows the menu bar of the Java Graphic User Interface. It allows the switching
between control pages that will be described in detail in next chapters.
Figure 5.
Java menu bar
The following controls are provided:
System commands bar allows to enable of the following commands:
Connect: releases/acquires the connection to the device.
Save: saves the device configuration.
Load: loads the last saved configuration.
Figure 6.
System commands bar
Operation pages bar allows to switch between the following windows:
Home Page: shows the firmware updating status, allows to reset the device, to locally
download the *.jar file, to enable the Stand-by mode and to switch between operative modes.
Input: shows ASI, GbE and Tuner input statistics.
Tuner: allows to monitor input channel, frequency offset, signal level and quality and to
monitor the Front-End demodulation parameters.
ITU: allows to monitor and to set the ITU specific parameters.
ISDB-T: allows to monitor and to set the ISDB-T specific parameters.
DVB-T: allows to monitor and to set the DVB-T specific parameters.
ATSC: allows to monitor and to set the ATSC specific parameters.
DVB-T2: allows to monitor and to set the DVB-T2 specific parameters.
Mod. Pha.: allows to manage the linear compensation curves.
AM PM: allows to manage the non-linear compensation curves.
Adaptive Linear Precorrection: allows to manage the adaptive linear compensation.
Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: allows to manage the adaptive non linear compensation.
Outputs: allows to set clock and output parameters and to monitor the hardware status.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 29 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Network: allows to monitor the Network settings of both GbE port 1 and GbE port 2 and to set
in/out Ethernet channels parameters.
GPS: shows received GPS statistics and provides commands to manage the Holdover
functionality.
Alarms: provides a grid where to set LCD, Graphic User Interface, Events, Relays, Traps, Input
Switch and RF Off alarm masks.
Events: shows the board events log and allows the manual setting of date and time.
Figure 7.
Operation pages bar
System menu allows to access the same commands and windows as System commands and Operation
pages bars do, plus management options, help and version information (refer to System menu
paragraph).
Figure 8.
System menu
A brief description of all the provided information and controls follows in the next paragraphs.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 30 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.3 Home Page
Click on Home Page button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the Home Page.
Figure 9.
Home Page window
The Home Page provides a general description of the equipment, the firmware updating status and a
subset of commands here below described:
Modes Management: shows the list of all the available modes, identified by their transmission
standard, and allows to switch between them.
Station Identifier: shows and sets the station name.
LCD Standby: enables the LCD Stand-by button.
Reset: resets the equipment.
Download Software Standalone: performs a local download of the *.jar file (refer to Download
Software Standaloneparagraph).
Firmware Updating Status: the three indicators turn into:
Yellow during FPGA, uC and GPS updating;
Green when the updating process is finished (FPGA and uC);
Grey when new code has been loaded (after next system reset).
The progress bars, at the right side of the FPGA and GPS indicators, show the status of firmware
loading process into FLASH. The FPGA and GPS indicators remain yellow until the new firmware
is loaded. When either FPGA or uC indicators turn into green, the transmitter shall be reset in
order to load the new software.
In the Home Page is also specified the installer version the device has been loaded with.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 31 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.4 Input
Click on Input button, highlighted in the next figure, to monitor the input statistics window.
Figure 10.
ATSC / DVB-T/T2 Input window
The Input window allows to monitor Transport Stream and SDI input statistics and to enable the cable
equalizer bypass of each one of them.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 32 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 5.
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
ASI
Word rate
Input word rate.
Tuner
Word rate
Input byte rate.
ASI - Tuner
Bitrate
Input bitrate.
ASI - Tuner
ASI - Tuner
ASI
ASI - Tuner
Filtered bitrate
Format
CD
Lock
Input window
Approximately 27 Mword/s
Bitrate actually used by the modulator.
Format of received TS Packets.
ASI Carrier detect.
The actual synchronization of the Transport Stream. It depends on
the number of correct sync bytes necessary for the device to
synchronize and on the number of destroyed sync bytes witch the
device cannot cope with.
Five consecutive correct sync bytes are sufficient for sync
acquisition, and two or more consecutive corrupted sync bytes
indicate sync loss (Ref. to ETSI TR 101 290)
Version 1.1
Admitted Ranges / Values
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Zero when the input has not been
selected
Equal to the total bitrate, when
Delete Null Packets disabled
Less than total bitrate, when Delete
Null Packets enabled
188 Bytes
204 Bytes
Green: Detected
Grey: Not detected
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Page 33 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
ASI - Tuner
Parameter / Control
Overflow
Description
TS input overflow indicator. This alarm condition occurs when the
input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation (Ref. to ETSI
EN 302 755).
ASI
Word Errors
Input error rate: word errors per second.
Tuner
Word Errors
Input error rate: Byte errors per second.
Equalizer Bypass
GbE 2–
Channel 1/2
GbE 2–
Channel 1/2
GbE 2–
Channel 1/2
GbE 2–
Channel 1/2
GbE 2–
Channel 1/2
ASI 1/2/3/4 Equalizer
Bypass
Equalizer Bypass
1/2/3/4
Protocol
Bitrate
Filtered bitrate
Format
Lock
Version 1.1
Enables/disables the bypassing of cable equalizers at ASI/SDI
inputs.
Ethernet input packets protocol.
Admitted Ranges / Values
Red: Alarm On
Grey: Alarm Off
Checked: Cable equalizer is
bypassed
Not checked: Cable equalizer is
used
UDP
RTP
Zero when the input is not selected
Equal to the total bit-rate, when
Delete Null Packets disabled
Less than total bit-rate, when Delete
Null Packets enabled
188 Bytes
204 Bytes
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Bitrate of TS from Ethernet input.
Bitrate actually used by the modulator.
Format of received TS Packets.
TS lock status. The input Transport Stream is unlocked when more
than two consecutive Sync Byte are missed then five consecutive
Sync Bytes must occur to regain the lock (Ref. to ETSI TR 101 290)
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 34 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
GbE 2–
Channel1/2
GbE 2– Statistics
GbE 2– Statistics
Parameter / Control
Overflow
GBE Good Pck
GbE Speed
Description
Input GbE overflow alarm status. This alarm condition occurs when
the input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation (Ref. to
ETSI EN 302 755).
Ethernet connection speed. No duplex information is provided.
GBE Bad Pck
The number of inbound packets that contained errors.
SDI 1/2/3/4
Lock
Shows the presence of a valid SDI input stream.
SDI 1/2/3/4
SDI 1/2/3/4
SDI 1/2/3/4
CD
Ch1-2
Ch3-4
Ch 1/2/3/4 Level
[dBFS]
Version 1.1
Red: Alarm on
Grey: Alarm off
10 Mbit//s
100 Mbit//s
1 Gbit//s
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
0 down to -114dB
Total amount of frames delivered to the higher-level protocol.
GbE 2– Statistics
SDI 1/2/3/4
Admitted Ranges / Values
Shows that the SDI input signal carrier has been correctly locked.
Shows that the SDI input audio data have been correctly locked.
Shows that the SDI input audio data have been correctly locked.
Shows the embedded digital audio level. Measured in dB difference
from the max digital level.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 35 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
SDI 1/2/3/4
Layers Rates
Layers Rates
Layers Rates
Parameter / Control
Description
Admitted Ranges / Values
NTSC 4:2:2 component video;
NTSC 4:2:2 16x9 component video;
NTSC 4:4:4 13,5 MHz component
video;
PAL 4:2:2 component video;
PAL 4:2:2 16x9 component video;
PAL 4:4:4 13,5 MHz component
video"
Red: Alarm on
Used in remux mode only.
Grey: Alarm off
Layer A/B/C
Layer input underflow alarm status.
Red: Alarm on
Underflow
Used in remux mode only.
Grey: Alarm off
Standard
Shows the video standard detected for the SDI input.
Layer A/B/C
Bitrate actually used by the modulator.
Rate [bit/s]
Used in remux mode only
Layer A/B/C
Layer input overflow alarm status. This alarm condition occurs when
the input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation
Overflow
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 36 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.5 Front-End
Click on Front-End button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the tuner window.
Figure 11.
Front-End window
Use the Tuner window to monitor input channel, frequency offset, signal level and quality, and to
monitor the RF input demodulation parameters.
The Tuner window is composed by the following sections:
RF power level monitor;
Demodulation parameters;
Constellation (DVB-T/T2).
Tuner window changes on the basis of the Front-End type. The available FE types are:
DVB-T/T2
ISDB-T
Digitizer
ATSC
DVB-S2
DVB-S2 CAM
A brief description of the features of each Tuner panel follows in next paragraphs.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 37 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.5.1 Tuner window: RF power level monitor
Box
General
General
General
General
General
General
Figure 12.
Tuner window: RF power level monitor
Table 6.
Tuner window: RF power level monitor
Parameter / Control
Rx Level [dBm] /
Progress Bar
Low Power Rx Signal
High Power Rx Signal
Channel
Offset [Hz]
Bandwidth [MHz]
Version 1.1
Description
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: -84
Low Power
Max: -21
High Power
This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beneath the Low AGC
Threshold and, consequently, both DAT 1 and DAT 2 are at their
minimum values.
Red: Alarm On
Grey: Alarm Off
This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beyond the High AGC
Threshold and, consequently, both DAT 1 and DAT 2 are at their
maximum values.
Red: Alarm On
Grey: Alarm Off
Input RF power level monitor expressed in dBm.
This indicator shows the input RF channel.
This indicator shows the input frequency offset.
Input channel bandwidth.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
VHF:
UHF:
Min: E2
Min: 21
Max: E12
Max: 69
Min: - 200 kHz
Max: + 200 kHz
It depends on the FE Type.
Page 38 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.5.2 DIGITIZER FE Type
This page shows the available statistics for the analog input video.
Figure 13.
Version 1.1
CVBS Inputs: Statistics
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 39 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 7.
Box
General
CVBS 1/2 input
CVBS 1/2 input
CVBS 1/2 input
CVBS 1/2 input
CVBS 1/2 input
CVBS 1/2 input
Parameter / Control
CVBS Inputs: Statistics
Description
A/D PAL
Compensation
Enable the PAL compensation on digitized video. This features
should be enabled only for particular application e.g. the external
ITS insertion in a PAL-M system.
Lock
General input video signal lock, this is on when the following three
signals are locked.
Vertical lock
Color sub
Horizontal lock
Standard
Field rate
Version 1.1
Shows the locking of the vertical synchronization signal.
Show the locking of the color subcarrier signal.
Show the locking of the horizontal synchronization signal.
Shows the detected input video standard. The video standard
detected must be compatible with the modulation defined for the
device, otherwise a “wrong input standard” alarm is raised.
Show the rate of video field refresh
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Enabled
Disabled
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
Green: Locked
Grey: Not locked
NTSC (M, J),
PAL (B, D, G, H, I, N),
PAL (M),
PAL (Combination-N),
NTSC,
SECAM,
PAL (60)
50Hz
60Hz
Page 40 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.5.3 ATSC FE Type
The Tuner panel for the ATSC Front-End shows the status of the demodulator, the input modulation
parameters and the received signal quality.
Figure 14.
Version 1.1
ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 41 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 8.
Box
General
General
ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters
Parameter / Control
VSB Demod Status
Equalyzer Status
Version 1.1
Description
VSB demodulation status.
Equalizer status.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Reset
Reset Wait
AGC Wait 1
AGC Wait 2
Carrier Synchro
NCO Loop
VCXO Wait
Segment Synchro
Tap Computation
Eq Training Mode
Start Eq
Error
EQ Reset
EQ FFE Train
EQ Blind 1
EQ Blind 2
EQ DDM 1
EQ DDM 2
Error
Page 42 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
General
Demodulator Lock
Demodulator lock status
General
Digital AGC Lock
Digital AGC lock status.
General
Frame Lock Indicator
General
Frame lock status.
Carrier Frequency
Loop Lock
Carrier frequency loop lock status.
Timing Frequency
Loop Lock
Timing frequency loop lock status.
General
Frequency Offset
[kHz]
Output carrier offset.
General
SNR [dB]
Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
General
SER
Segment Error Rate.
General
BER
Bit Error Rate.
General
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Green: Locked
Grey: Unlocked
Green: Locked
Grey: Unlocked
Green: Locked
Grey: Unlocked
Green: Locked
Grey: Unlocked
Green: Locked
Grey: Unlocked
Page 43 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.6 ATSC
Click on ATSC button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ATSC window.
Figure 15.
ATSC window
Use the ATSC Processing page to manage ATSC specific configuration parameters and to monitor output
signal level and quality.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 44 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.6.1 ATSC Settings
Click on the ATSC Settings button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ATSC general settings.
Figure 16.
ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings
Use the ATSC Settings page to select inputs, to set input/output RF channels, offset frequencies,
Frontend and Measure alarm thresholds and to manage Input Autoswitch functionality (refer to
Appendix A for further information).
Settings within this page will be used only in ATSC mode but will be saved and stored as mode specific
controls.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 45 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 9.
Box
Parameter / Control
ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings
Description
Input selector.
Input
Input
Input Selector
Input Alarm Delay [s]
It is not allowed to change input until the Input Autoswitch is
enabled. In order to change the primary input, disable the Input
Autoswitch functionality, select a different input through the input
selector and then enable the Input Autoswitch functionality.
Time to wait for No Input alarm rising expressed in seconds (refer to
Alarms paragraph).
Note: It is highly recommended to set an Input Alarm Delay value
different from zero so as to allow the input signal locking.
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Auto Input Enable
Actual Input
Version 1.1
Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine.
Refer to Appendix A. for further information.
Shows the currently used input.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
ASI 1
ASI 2
ASI 3
ASI 4
Tuner
GbE 2 ch1
GbE 2 ch2
Min: 1 s
Max: 25.5 s
Enabled
Disabled
ASI 1
ASI 2
ASI 3
ASI 4
Tuner
GbE 2 ch1
GbE 2 ch2
Page 46 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Tuner
Tuner
FE Alarm
Thresholds
Parameter / Control
Primary to Secondary
Switch Counter
Description
Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in
seconds.
Secondary to
Secondary Switch
Counter
Secondary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in
seconds.
Secondary to Primary
Switch Counter
Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed in
seconds.
State
Channel
Offset [Hz]
SNR Thr [dB]
Version 1.1
Current state of the finite-state machine
Input RF channel selector.
The receiver frequency will accept offset frequencies in the range
+/- 200 kHz (1 Hz steps).
FE Signal to Noise alarm threshold.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: 0 s
Max: *.def file dependant
Default: 25 s
Min: 0 s
Max: *.def file dependant
Default: 25 s
Min: 0 s
Max: *.def file dependant
Default: 300 s
Priority Input Locked
Priority Input Not Locked
Searching First Input Locked
Check Priority Input
Min: 14
Max: 77
Min: - 200 kHz
Max: + 200 kHz
Min: 10 dB
Max: 50 dB
Page 47 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
MEAS Alarm
Thresholds
SNR Thr [dB]
Output
Channel
Output channel.
Output
Offset [Hz]
Output frequency offset (expressed in Hz).
Meas Signal to Noise alarm threshold.
Min: 10
Max: 50
Channel ranges are device’s definition
dependant.
Output
Power [dBm]
Output power (expressed in dBm).
Output
Power [W]
Output power (expressed in W).
Version 1.1
Admitted Ranges / Values
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Min: -200 kHz
Max: +200 kHz
Output power ranges are device’s
definition dependant.
Page 48 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.6.2 ATSC Modulation
The ATSC Modulation window allows to select test signals and to manage the M/H mode.
Figure 17.
Version 1.1
ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 49 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 10.
Box
MODULATION
Parameter / Control
Delete Null Packets
TEST
M/H
M/H
M/H
M/H REGEN
ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation
Description
Checked: Enabled
Not checked: Disabled
None
CW
Force Null Packets
Min: 0
Max: 8191
Grey: M/H mode disabled
Green: Alarm OFF.
Red: Alarm ON
Checked: Enabled
Not checked: Disabled
Enables/disables the M/H Regeneration mode.
Checked: Enabled
The maximum M/H total number of groups supported by the M/H
Regeneration mode is 8.
Not checked: Disabled
Delete null packets enabling check box.
The selector of test signal.
PID
Frame Status
M/H Mode Enable
Enable
Version 1.1
Admitted Ranges / Values
Sets the PID of M/H packets.
M/H frame alarm.
Enables/disables the M/H mode.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 50 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.6.3 ATSC TVCT
The ATSC TVCT window allows to modify On-The-Fly Major and Minor channel numbers associated with
the virtual channels defined in the incoming TVCT.
If the definition of the current TVCT changes, the version number of the table shall be accordingly
modified otherwise the functioning of the facility is not assured.
Note: On-The-Fly processing of multi-section TVCTs is not supported.
Figure 18.
ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation
Click on Add button to add an entry to the channel numbers table. The insertion of a Channel In being
not defined in the incoming TVCT won’t result in any change in the output TVCT.
Figure 19.
ATSC TVCT: Add button
The available controls in the ATSC TVCT windows follow:
Add: Adds an entry to the table.
Remove: Removes an entry from the table.
Apply: Applies the new configuration.
Clear All: Empties the entries of the channel numbers table.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 51 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.6.4 ATSC Measure
Click on Measure button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the measure window.
Figure 20.
ATSC Processing: ATSC Measure
Use the Measure window to monitor output signal level and quality.
Refer to ATSC FE Type paragraph for a detailed description of each field within this window.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 52 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.6.4.1 ATSC Measure window: RF power level monitor
Box
General
Parameter / Control
Monitor Tx Level
[dBm] /
Progress Bar
General
General
Low Power Tx Signal
High Power Tx Signal
Version 1.1
Figure 21.
ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor
Table 11.
ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor
Description
This value is the level of the signal, passing through the
transmission section and re-entering the system after the channel
filter, that will be used for the adaptive compensation.
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: - 20
Low Power
Max: 11,5
High Power
This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beneath the Low AGC
Threshold and, consequently, input attenuation is at its minimum
level.
Red: Alarm On
Grey: Alarm Off
This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beyond the High AGC
Threshold and, consequently, input attenuation is at its maximum
level.
Red: Alarm On
Grey: Alarm Off
The tolerance of the read value is ±1 dB.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 53 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.7 ITU.470
Click on ITU button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ITU modulator parameters window.
Figure 22.
ITU window
Use the ITU Processing page to manage the configuration of the analog modulator.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 54 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.7.1 ITU Settings
Click on the ITU Settings button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ITU general settings.
Figure 23.
ITU Processing: ITU Settings
Use the ITU Settings page to select inputs, to set input/output RF channels, offset frequencies, Frontend
and Measure alarm thresholds and to manage Input Autoswitch functionality (refer to Appendix A for
further information).
Settings within this page will be used only in ITU mode but will be saved and stored as mode specific
controls.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 55 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 12.
Box
Parameter / Control
ITU Processing: ITU Settings
Description
SDI 1
Use this control to select one of the available video inputs. CVBS
analog inputs are available only when the A/V frontend is available.
SDI 2
SDI 3
When and SDI input is selected, the embedded audio channel for
that input are modulated and the user can select between channel
1-2 and channel 3-4. When CVBS input is selected the relative
analog audio input channels are used.
SDI 4
CVBS 1
CVBS 2
Channel 1-2
Channel 3-4
Video input selector.
Input
Video input
Admitted Ranges / Values
Embedded audio channels selector.
Input
Output
Output
Embedded audio
input
Channel
Offset [Hz]
When a SDI input is selected this control can be used to send the
embedded audio channels 1-2 or the embedded audio channels 3-4
to the modulation.
Output RF channel selector.
VHF (BIII EU
option):
UHF (UHF EU
option):
Output channel selection depends on the channel planning
definition loaded on the device. The following ranges and values
are typical for Italian/European TV channels.
Min: E2
Min: 21
Max: E12
Max: 69
Min: - 200 kHz
Max: + 200 kHz
Min and Max values depends on the
power class of the device. e.g. for a
SDTX-500 device:
28 dBm up to 48 dBm
The receiver frequency will accept offset frequencies in the range
+/- 200 kHz (1 Hz steps).
Output power setting.
Output
Power [dBm]
Version 1.1
This control sets the output power in dBm values. Changing this
control will also change the value of power control expressed in W.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 56 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
Output power setting.
Output
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Input Autoswitch
Power [w]
Auto Input Enable
Actual Input
Primary to Secondary
Switch Counter
This control sets the output power in W. Changing this control will
also change the value of power control expressed in dBm.
Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine.
Refer to Appendix A. for further information.
Shows the currently used input.
Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in
seconds.
Secondary to
Secondary Switch
Counter
Secondary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in
seconds.
Secondary to Primary
Switch Counter
Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed in
seconds.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min and Max values depends on the
power class of the device. e.g. for a
SDTX-500 device:
0.63 W up to 63 W
Enabled
Disabled
SDI 1
SDI 2
SDI 3
SDI 4
CVBS 1
CVBS 2
Min: 0 s
Max: *.def file dependant
Default: 25 s
Min: 0 s
Max: *.def file dependant
Default: 25 s
Min: 0 s
Max: *.def file dependant
Default: 300 s
Page 57 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Input Autoswitch
Parameter / Control
State
Version 1.1
Description
Current state of the finite-state machine
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Priority Input Locked
Priority Input Not Locked
Searching First Input Locked
Check Priority Input
Page 58 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°
5.7.2 ITU Modulation
The ITU Modulation window allows actual modulation parameters monitoring and setting.
Figure 24.
ITU Processing page: ITU Modulation
The ITU Modulation window is composed by the following sections:
Modulator manager;
Test: used to manage RF test modes and Audio-Video test
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 59 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°
5.7.2.1 ITU Modulation: Modulator manager
Commands and indicators belonging to this section allow to:
Select the video modulation parameters;
Set the audio modulation parameters;
Set the group delay.
Figure 25.
Version 1.1
ITU Modulation: Modulator manager
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 60 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 13.
Box
Video
Video
Video
Parameter / Control
White Level [%]
Synch. Amplitude
[%]
Pedes Level [%]
ITU Modulation: Modulator manager
Description
Video white level setting. The level value is in percentage upon the
synch level. The synch level is taken as 100% reference.
Video synch amplitude setting. The level value is in percentage
upon the synch level. The synch level is taken as 100% reference.
Video pedes level setting. The level value is in percentage upon the
synch level. The synch level is taken as 100% reference.
Audio deviation.
Audio
Audio
MIN: 10
MAX: 22
Step: 0,05
MIN: 22
MAX: 27,5
Step: 0,05
MIN: 0
MAX: 7
Step: 0,05
Relative values
0 up to 255
This parameter is used to change the frequency deviation of the
audio modulation in order to adjust the audio volume.
Default value 100
Audio 1 carrier level setting.
MIN: -22
MAX: -7
Step: 1
Deviation
Carrier Level 1 [dB]
This parameter is the amplitude difference, expressed in dB values,
between the video carrier and the audio 1 carrier.
Version 1.1
Admitted Ranges / Values
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 61 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
Audio 2 carrier level setting.
Audio
Carrier Level 2 [dB]
MIN: -22
MAX: -7
Step: 1
50us (used for PAL-BG)
75us
Audio emphasis enabled (not
ticked);
This control disables the audio emphasis.
Audio emphasis disabled (ticked).
Audio modulation type selection.
Mono dual carrier;
Dual sound;
Stereo;
Mono single carrier.
FM 5.5/5.742
This parameter is the amplitude difference, expressed in dB values,
between the video carrier and the audio 1 carrier. Not used for
mono audio carrier configurations such as NTSC or PAL M.
Audio emphasis value monitor.
Audio
Emphasis
The audio emphasis used depends on the modulation standard.
Audio
Audio
Emphasis disable
Audio type
Admitted Ranges / Values
Audio emphasis disable.
This control selects the audio modulation mode. Stereo and dual
carrier modes are not available for standards that support mono
audio only.
Audio carrier spacing selector.
Audio
Sound system
This control shows more options for the standard that supports
more than one audio carrier spacing.
Select the group delay to apply.
Group delay
Group delay selector
The available group delay curve depends on the group delay
definition loaded on the device.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
e.g. for PAL BG:
Flat (no group delay curve)
Curve A
Curve B
Page 62 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.7.2.2 ITU Modulation: Modulator test controls
The following controls enable the testing of RF signal, audio and video.
Figure 26.
Version 1.1
ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 63 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 14.
Box
Test
Test
Parameter / Control
Test mode
Video test
ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes
Description
Enables one of the available video test signals.
Audio test
Enables one of the available audio test signals.
Test
Tone right [100 Hz]
Set the frequency of the right channel test tone. Base unit is
100Hz.
Test
Tone left [100 Hz]
Mute audio enable
Version 1.1
None;
CW: non modulated carrier at
centre frequency;
CW AV: non modulated video and
audio carriers;
Input video. No test signal;
SMPTE bars;
Horizontal bars;
Red field.
No audio test;
Test tone. Sin waves at the
selected frequency on left and right
channel. (Left only for mono
modulations)
Base unit 100 Hz;
0 up to 127, 0 up to 12.7 kHz.
Base unit 100 Hz;
0 up to 127, 0 up to 12.7 kHz.
Mute audio disabled: audio carries
are transmitted;
Mute audio enabled: audio carriers
are suppressed.
Enables one of the available test modes for RF signal.
Test
Test
Admitted Ranges / Values
Set the frequency of the right channel test tone. Base unit is
100Hz.
Enables the audio carriers’ suppression for test purposes.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 64 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Parameter / Control
ITS 0
ITS 1
ITS 2
ITS 3
ITS 4
Enable ITS insert
Version 1.1
Description
Select the line where to inject the ITS 0 when the enable ITS insert
option is enabled.
Select the line where to inject the ITS 1 when the enable ITS insert
option is enabled.
Select the line where to inject the ITS 2 when the enable ITS insert
option is enabled.
Select the line where to inject the ITS 3 when the enable ITS insert
option is enabled.
Select the line where to inject the ITS 4 when the enable ITS insert
option is enabled.
Enables the insertion of Injected Test Signals in the selected video
lines.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: 7
Max: 622
Min: 7
Max: 622
Min: 7
Max: 622
Min: 7
Max: 622
Min: 7
Max: 622
Min: 7
Max: 622
Page 65 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.8 Manual compensation
5.8.1 Linear Precorrection
Click on Linear Precorrection button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the filter window.
Figure 27.
Adaptive Linear Precorrection
The ARK6 system provides a pre-correction tool for Module&Phase output signal pre-correction.
This tool provides two grids for the drawing of:
Module of the filter’s curve.
Group Delay of the filter’s curve.
The two curves are used to calculate the linear pre-correction coefficients. The curves are drawn by the
interpolation of 1024 points referring to the points inserted and using a linear or polynomial
interpolation algorithm.
Knob points can be added with a left-click of the mouse on the grid and deleted with a right-click, drag
and move a point to change the curve.
Each coefficient variation, due to curves change, is saved in the FPGA “runtime” memory registers and
dynamically changes the device’s output.
The tool is prevented to send an “overflowing” amount of data to the device: curve changes will be
applied only when the mouse button is released.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 66 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
In the module grid, the red curve is used to monitor the current module curve calculating and saving.
The last saved coefficients are locally downloaded from the FPGA runtime memory registers in order to
redraw the curve.
Remember to click on the Save as button the first time you change the factory default curves in order to
do not overwrite them.
The following buttons allow the management of linear pre-correction files and the management of the
connection to port 5000:
Save: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file
will be overwritten except in the event that no files have been saved before; in this case a
dedicated window appears in order to let the user name the new file.
Save as: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file
will be overwritten with a new name. In the event that no files have been saved before, a new
file will be created.
Read file: used to reload the last saved file.
Export: used to download pre-correction files on the user PC. A browser window allows the
selection of the saving path.
Release: releases the connection in order to allow others remote machines to connect to port
5000 (refer to Connection to port 5000 paragraph).
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 67 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.8.2 Non Linear Precorrection
Click on AM/PM button icon, highlighted in the next figure, to access the pre-correction window.
Figure 28.
AM/PM Precorrection
Two main actions are possible in this section:
AM/AM and AM/PM curve drawing: used to change the AM/PM pre-correction coefficient.
AM/PM pre-correction files management: used to open or save AM/PM pre-correction setting
file.
AM/AM and AM/PM curves are specific for each power range of each output channel.
The two curves are used to calculate the AM/PM pre-correction coefficients. The curves are drawn by
the interpolation of 1024 points referring to the points inserted and using a linear or polynomial
interpolation algorithm.
Knob points can be added with a left-click of the mouse on the grid and deleted with a right-click, drag
and move a point to change the curve.
Each coefficient variation, due to curves change, is saved in the FPGA “runtime” memory registers and
dynamically changes the device’s output.
The tool is prevented to send an “overflowing” amount of data to the device: curve changes will be
applied only when the mouse button is released.
In the module grid, the red curve is used to monitor the current module curve calculating and saving.
The last saved coefficients are locally downloaded from the FPGA runtime memory registers in order to
redraw the curve.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 68 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
During saving actions one linear pre-correction file is created, the *.dpre file, which contains the digital
coefficients for linear pre-correction filter.
The following buttons allow the management of non linear pre-correction files and the management of
the connection to port 5000:
Save: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file
will be overwritten except in the event that no files have been saved before; in this case a
dedicated window appears in order to let the user name the new file.
Save as: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file
will be overwritten with a new name. In the event that no files have been saved before, a new
file will be created.
Read file: used to reload the last saved file.
Export: used to download pre-correction files on the user PC. A browser window allows the
selection of the saving path.
Release: releases the connection in order to allow others remote machines to connect to port
5000 (refer to Connection to port 5000 paragraph).
5.8.3 Port 5000 connection
The connection to port 5000 is performed every time a pre-correction tool is opened through Mod. Pha.
and AM/PM buttons, from Java interface. The pre-correction tool opens and keeps busy the connection
to port 5000 till the connection releasing.
The connection to this port precludes the possibility of:
programming the device;
allowing more than one user, the very same one that is keeping busy the connection, to open
the pre-correction tools,
saving the parameters of the Option sub-menu.
The Release button comes through these limits. It closes the connection to port 5000, close the Mod.
Pha. / AM/PM window and opens the General window. Once clicked the Release buttons and before
quitting the pre-correction tool, three options are provided:
Continue: continue without saving;
Save and Release: save, continue and release the connection;
Cancel: cancel the request of releasing the connection.
Figure 29.
Version 1.1
Realizing connection
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 69 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.9 Adaptive compensation
5.9.1 Linear Adaptive Precorrection
Click on Linear Adaptive Precorrection button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the filter window.
Figure 30.
Adaptive Linear Precorrection
This window provides commands and indicators for adaptive filter management and monitor.
The Filter window is organized as follows:
Management panel.
Complex filter coefficients graph.
Module graph.
Phase graph.
In order to enable the adaptive linear precorrection, click on the ON/OFF button.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 70 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.9.1.1 Adaptive Filter
The Adaptive Filter provides the ARK6 with an effective adaptive linear compensation.
The developed system is responsible for pre-emptively compensating a DVB-T/T2 signal in order to make
unimportant the contribution of the system transmission section. The signal passes through the
transmission section and re-enters the system as to determine the distortion and the compensating
adaptive filter.
The system is composed of two main blocks: a Power Calculation block and a 128-tap Complex FIR. The
modulated signal, with IQ format and sampled at c frequency, enters both blocks:
Power Calculation block is responsible for estimating the mean power level that will be restored at both
transmitting and receiving sides;
128-tap Complex FIR is responsible for linearly pre-correcting the modulated signal. Filter coefficients
are obtained by estimating the channel between the signal before the transmission section and the
signal reentering the system, after the channel distortion and the A/D conversion.
Figure 31.
Version 1.1
Adaptive Filter
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 71 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.9.1.2 Adaptive Linear Precorrection: Management panel
Table 15.
Box
Parameter / Control
Adaptive Linear Precorrection: Management panel
Description
General
Load
Loads filter coefficients from the respective FPGA registers.
General
Clear
Loads flat curve coefficients.
General
Timeout [s]
Once enabled, the adaptive linear compensation has a timeout.
When the timeout is expired, the precorrection is stopped. In order
to continue updating coefficients, click on ON/OFF button.
General
Save
Saves the current adaptive filter coefficients.
General
ON/OFF
Enables the adaptive linear compensation.
General
Status
Shows the type of adaptive compensation currently used, if any.
Admitted Ranges / Values
Fixed to 60 seconds
ON(Green):Enabled
OFF(Red): Disabled
None
Linear
Non Linear
Red: Alarm On
Low Power Rx Signal
Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a low power.
When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is
stopped.
General
Grey: Alarm Off
Red: Alarm On
High Power Rx Signal
Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a high power.
When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is
stopped.
General
Grey: Alarm Off
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 72 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.9.1.3 Complex Filter coefficients graph
The Complex Filter coefficients graph shows the current coefficients values. The circles indicate the real
part of coefficients; the red crosses indicate the imaginary one.
Figure 32.
Filter window: complex filter coefficients graph
5.9.1.4 Module graph
The Module graph shows the actual output signal module according to the complex filer coefficients
applied.
Figure 33.
Filter window: module graph
5.9.1.5 Phase graph
The Phase graph shows the actual output signal phase according to the complex filer coefficients
applied.
Figure 34.
Version 1.1
Filter window: phase graph
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 73 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.9.2 Adaptive Non-Linear Precorrection
The Non Linear Adaptive Filter provides the ARK6-T2 with an effective adaptive non linear
compensation.
The developed system is responsible for pre-emptively compensating the signal in order to make
unimportant the contribution of the intermodulation products due to the power amplifiers.
The signal passes through the power amplifiers and re-enters the system as to determine the distortion
and the compensating adaptive filter.
In order to enable the adaptive non linear precorrection, click on the ON/OFF button.
Figure 35.
Version 1.1
Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 74 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.9.2.1 Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: Management panel
Table 16.
Box
Parameter / Control
Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: Management panel
Description
General
Clear
Resets the filter coefficients to zero.
General
ON/OFF
Enables the adaptive non linear compensation.
General
Status
Shows the type of adaptive compensation currently used, if any.
Admitted Ranges / Values
ON(Green):Enabled
OFF(Red): Disabled
None
Linear
Non Linear
Red: Alarm On
Low Power Rx Signal
Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a low power.
When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is
stopped.
General
Grey: Alarm Off
Red: Alarm On
High Power Rx Signal
Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a high power.
When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is
stopped.
General
Grey: Alarm Off
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 75 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.10 Output
Click on Output button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the output window.
Figure 36.
Output window
Use the Output window to change Ethernet, RF and ASI outputs settings, and to monitor all available
hardware indicators.
ASI Out selectors are used as direct bypass of the specified inputs to ASI OUT HP and ASI OUT LP output
interfaces.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 76 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 17.
Box
General
Parameter / Control
RF ON / OFF
Output window
Description
Output RF signal enabling. The possible output RF signal status are
the following:
ON;
RF OFF: automatic switch off of the output signal (refer to
Amplifier status);
Clock
Frequency reference
Actual Freq. Ref.
Centre
Frequency[Hz]
AGC
Green: ON
Green: RF OFF
Red: OFF
External
Internal
GPS
External
Internal
GPS
Green: ON
Grey: OFF
OFF: manual switch off of the output signal.
Frequency reference source selector. This command will select the
reference source used to lock the internal clocks (10 MHz and 1
PPS). When set to internal the 10 MHz clock and 1 PPS generator
runs unlocked. When set to external or GPS the 10 MHz clock is
locked to the source selected and the 1 PPS counter reset is
triggered by the source 1 PPS.
Clock
Admitted Ranges / Values
Note: External 10 MHz, 1PPS and GPS shall be connected and
locked when the External and GPS are selected as frequency
references. If the Network Mode is SFN and the Frequency
Reference is set to Internal, the frequency reference is
automatically forced to GPS and the event “Freq Ref Forced: GPS”
is generated Use the Actual Freq. Ref.indicator in order to check
the used reference source.
Frequency reference source actually used.
Shows the output centre frequency expressed in Hz.
AGC ON
Version 1.1
AGC status.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 77 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Status
Parameter / Control
PS 26V [V]
Description
Min: 24V
Max: 28V
Max: 8A
Min: 45V
Max: 55V
Max: 18A
Min: 45V
Max: 55V
Third PSU current indicator, expressed in Ampere, for SDTx501
devices.
Max: 18A
Current amplifier status indicator:
ON
PS Alarm OFF
Restarting
Stand-by OFF
Init
Alarm OFF
RF OFF
Opto OFF
Change mode
Missing file OFF
First PSU voltage indicator, expressed in Volt, for SDTx20,
SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501 devices.
Status
PS Current 26V [A]
First PSU current indicator, expressed in Ampere, for SDTx20,
SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501 devices.
Status
PS1 50V [V]
Second PSU voltage indicator, expressed in Volt, for SDTx201 and
SDT501 devices.
Status
PS1 Current 50V [A]
Second PSU current indicator, expressed in Ampere, for SDTx201
and SDT501 devices.
Status
PS2 50V [V]
Third PSU voltage indicator, expressed in Volt, for SDTx501
devices.
Status
Status
PS2 Current 50V [A]
Ampli status
Version 1.1
Admitted Ranges / Values
1. ON: the amplifier has been manually set to on and no alarms
or settings switched it off
2. PS Alarm OFF: when an alarm of over current, over voltage or
over power occurs on the second or third Power Supply, the
Amplifier is restarted four times, if the alarm is still on, the
Amplifier is automatically switched off. Single Power Supply
models do not support this status
3. Restart: the amplifier has been automatically restarted due to
an alarm for over current, over voltage or forward power
exceeding the upper limit on the second Power Supply. Single
Power Supply models do not support this status
4. Stand-by OFF: the equipment has been put on Standby mode
and the amplifier has been automatically muted
5. Init: at every amplifier initialization the amp is automatically
switched off.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 78 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
Alarm OFF: an alarm switched off the amplifier
RF OFF: amplifier manually set to off
Opto OFF: output RF is switched off by an optocoupler
Change mode: the amplifier is automatically switched off
during the mode switch (e.g. T1 / T2)
10. Missing file OFF: the amplifier is automatically switched off
because of the lack of *.cdef and *.def files (additional files will
be included in future releases).
11. Loading New Config: the amplifier is automatically switched off
during the loading of new T2 configuration parameters,
12. Reflex Pwr High retry: the output RF stage has been restart
because of the reflex power that has gone over the maximum
threshold.
13. Reflex Pwr Alarm: the maximum number of attempts to restore
the system after a Reflex Power High warning has been
reached, the equipment is in Reflex Power High alarm and the
Amplifier has been automatically switched off.
14. Test Mode: the amplifier is in ON state, but the transmitter is
modulating a test signal instead of the selected input.
15. Start New Firmware: during the loading of a new fw the output
RF is OFF.
16. Restart Mode: a system error occurs and the FPGA fw boot is
forced. During these operations the amplifier is turned OFF.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Status
RF Temperature [°C]
Case temperature indicator (values are expressed in °C).
Status
RF Temperature
[°C]
2nd Case temperature indicator (values are expressed in °C).
Status
PSU Temperature
Status
Fan 1
Version 1.1
Admitted Ranges / Values
Loading New Config
Reflex Pwr High Retry
Reflex Pwr High Alarm
Test Mode
Start New Fw
Restart Mode
Only in SDTx201 and SDTx501 versions.
PSU temperature indicator (values are expressed in °C).
Fan 1 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm).
Used in SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 79 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Status
Fan 2
Status
Fan 3
Status
Fan 4
Description
Fan 2 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm).
Used in SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501.
Fan 3 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm).
Used in SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501.
Fan 4 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm).
Used in SDTx501.
Shows the status of the CPU fan.
There are two types of errors:
Status
CPU Fan
Fan fault: fan speed equal to zero;
No Fan: the CPU fan is not connected.
Status
FWD Power [dBm]
Output forward power indicator (values are expressed in dBm).
Status
Reflex Power [dBm]
Output reflex power indicator (values are expressed in dBm).
Opto & Relay
Opto & Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
Version 1.1
Admitted Ranges / Values
Selector of Relay 0 mode.
FAN_OK
FAN_FAULT
NO_FAN
Alarm: indicator of an alarm
condition
Mode: indicator of operating mode
RF Status: indicator output RF
signal status (on/off)
Alarm: indicator of an alarm
condition
Mode: indicator of operating mode
Selector of Relay 1 mode.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 80 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Opto & Relay
Parameter / Control
Relay 0…3
Description
Green: Alarm on/Mode A/RF Off
Grey: Alarm off/Mode B/RF On
Green: Closed (0)
Grey: Opened (1)
Switch mode Opto status indicators.
When the Switch mode is set to Opto:
Green: Closed (0)
Closed (0): Switch to mode B
Grey: Opened (1)
Opened (1): Switch to mode A
Green: Closed (0)
Grey: Opened (1)
Relays status indicators.
RF Off Opto status indicators.
Opto 0 is a output RF manual on/off switch:
Opto&Relay
RF OFF
Admitted Ranges / Values
Closed (0): RF off
Opened (1): RF on (default value)
NOT AVAILABLE
Opto&Relay
N.A.
NOT AVAILABLE
Opto&Relay
Opto&Relay
N.A.
Stand-By
Retry of amplifier alarms status indicators.(only in SDTX 201
version);
Stand-by enabling Opto status indicators: .(in version SDTX
20/50/201);
Closed (0): stand-by on
Opened (1): stand-by off
Interlock Opto status indicators.(only in SDTX 501 version);
General
Channel
Version 1.1
Closed (0): Interlock off
Opened (1): Interlock on
Stand-by enabling Opto status indicators
Green: Closed (0)
Grey: Opened (1)
Interlock Opto status indicators
Green: Closed (0)
Red: Opened (1)
Channel ranges are device’s definition
dependant.
Output channel.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 81 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
General
Parameter / Control
Offset [Hz]
Description
Output frequency offset (expressed in Hz).
General
Power [dBm]
Output power (expressed in dBm).
General
Power [W]
Output power (expressed in W).
General
Bandwidth [MHz]
The output channel bandwidth.
FWD Power
Thresholds
Warning [dB]
Forward power warning threshold expressed in dB.
FWD Power
Thresholds
Alarm [dB]
Forward power alarm threshold expressed in dB.
Temperature
Thresholds
Warning [°C]
Temperature warning threshold expressed in °C.
Temperature
Thresholds
Alarm [°C]
Temperature alarm threshold expressed in °C.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
Enable send frame
Ethernet channel 1 transmission enabling.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: -200 kHz
Max: +200 kHz
Output power ranges are device’s
definition dependant.
It depends on the device definition.
Min: -16 dB
Max: 0 dB
Min: 50 °C
Max: 74 °C
Checked: Enabled
Not checked: Disabled
Page 82 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
GbE ch1/2 Out
Parameter / Control
Input
Status
Version 1.1
Description
It selects which TS input shall be re-transmitted on RTP output
channel 1.
This selection is totally independent from the selection of the TS
input to the modulator.
Ethernet transmission on channel 1 status indicator.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
ASI 1
ASI 2
ASI 3
ASI 4
Tuner 1 (if present)
Tuner 2 (if present)
GbE 2 ch1
GbE 2 ch2
Resolving IP Addr.
IP not found
No entry
Transmitting data
Transmitting data multicast
No TS input
ON
OFF
Page 83 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
Admitted Ranges / Values
ASI Out 1/2
Input
ASI 1
ASI 2
Digital modes:
ASI 3
Selects which Transport Stream shall be re-proposed on ASI OUT
HP/LP output.
ASI 4
Tuner 1 (if present)
Tuner 2 (if present)
Analog modes:
GbE 2 ch1
Selects which SDI input shall be re-proposed on ASI OUT HP/LP
output.
GbE 2 ch2
Rate Ad Out
This selection is totally independent from the selection of the input
of the modulator.
Version 1.1
Digital:
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Analog:
SDI 1
SDI 2
SDI 3
SDI 4
Page 84 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°
5.10.1 Reflex Power Management
The ARK6 is provided with a reflex power control logic that prevents the amplifier stage from being
permanently damaged.
Figure 37.
Reflex Pwr Management
If the output reflex power goes over its alarm threshold, the amplifier stage is automatically shut down
and the system reacts to this situation on the basis of the user selectable “Number of attempts”.
In the case that the user sets a “Number of attempts” equal to zero, the red “RFL Power High” LED is
turned on, the “Status” indicator shows “Alarm” and the amplifier stage is shut down by a “Reflex Pwr
High Alarm”.
In the case that the user sets N as “Number of attempts”, where N is different from zero, a self test is
conducted to determine if the system can be successfully restored. The red “RFL Power High” LED is
turned on, the “Status” indicator shows “Warning” and the amplifier stage is restarted N times. The
delay between two consecutive attempts is fixed to 10 seconds. At every RF ON/OFF the “Ampli status”
indicator will show “Reflex Pwr High Retry”. When the maximum number of attempts is reached, the
“Status” indicator shows “Alarm” and the amplifier stage is shut down by a “Reflex Pwr High Alarm”.
When the “Reflex Pwr High Alarm” is on the amplifier stage is permanently shut down. Once the
operator has carried out the necessary checks, the amplifier shall be manually reset through the button
“Reset”.
If the RFL power control mechanism is in warning state and the RFL power level doesn’t go over the
alarm threshold for 30 minutes, the amplifier stage is automatically reset.
The events associated to the reflex power control logic are the following:
“RFL Power Warning”: the reflex power level is higher than the specification and the “Number
of attempts” is different from zero.
“RFL Power OK”: RFL power goes under the alarm threshold.
“RFL Power Alarm”: RFL power goes over the alarm threshold for N times, where N is the
number of attempts specified in the Output page of the Java GUI.
“RFL RF OFF”: The output RF has been switched off because of either a RFL Power Warning (for
every attempt to restore the system) or a RFL Power Alarm.
“RFL RF ON ”N”: The output RF has been switched on after attempt number “N”.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 85 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 18.
Box
Parameter / Control
Reflex Pwr
Management
Number of attempts
Reflex Pwr
Management
Current number of
attempt
Reflex Pwr
Management
Status
Output window: Reflex Pwr Management
Description
The number of attempts to restore the system after RFL power has
gone over the alarm threshold.
The current number attempt to restore the system.
It shows the current status of the Reflex Power.
Reflex Pwr
Management
RFL Power High
Reflex Pwr
Management
Timeout [s]
The timeout between two consecutive attempts.
Reflex Pwr
Management
Reset
This button resets the amplifier stage when it is switched off due to
a Reflex Power High alarm.
Reflex Pwr
Management
Reset Timeout [s]
If the RFL power control mechanism is in warning state and the
RFL power level doesn’t go over the alarm threshold for 30 minutes,
the amplifier stage is automatically reset.
Version 1.1
It shows if RFL power goes over the alarm threshold.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: 0
Max: 255
Min: 0
Max: “Number of attempts”
OK
Warning
Alarm
Red: RFL power over the alarm
threshold
Grey: RFL power under the alarm
threshold
Fixed to 10 seconds
Fixed to 30 minutes
Page 86 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.11 Network
Click on Network button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the Network management window.
Figure 38.
Network window
This window allows the Network management on both PRO-MPEG COP 3 RX and TX sides. It also allows
the monitoring of the board IP and MAC addresses.
Note: The Clock Recovery Function, used in MFN transmissions of received streams on Ethernet channels
1 and/or 2, is based on the timestamps of incoming packets. UDP packets do not contain STS information
therefore it is not allowed using GbE inputs with UDP protocol in MFN transmission mode.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 87 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 19.
Box
Parameter / Control
Network window
Description
GbE 1/2 General
Settings /
Network
IP address
Gbe port 1 / 2 IP address.
GbE 1/2 General
Settings /
Network
MAC address
Gbe port 1 / 2 MAC address.
GbE 1/2 General
Settings /
Network
Gateway
Gbe port 1 / 2 Gateway address.
GbE 1/2 General
Settings /
Network
Netmask
Gbe port 1 / 2 Netmask.
GbE 2 General
Settings /
Network
IGMP Enable
Enables the IGMP protocol.
GbE 2 General
Settings /
Network
Source Port
Trap IP address
1/2/3
Manager Trap 1/2/3 IP addresses.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
IP Address
Channel 1/2 receiving IP address.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
Port
Channel 1/2 receiving port.
Version 1.1
Board transmitting port.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Checked: Enabled
Not checked: Disabled
Min: 0
Max: 65.535
Min: 0
Max: 65,535
Page 88 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
Admitted Ranges / Values
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx
GbE 1 / 2 Statistic
GbE 1 / 2 Statistic
Protocol
Bitrate
Filtered bitrate
Format
Lock
Overflow
RTP Clock
GbE Good Pck
GbE Speed
Version 1.1
Ethernet input packets protocol.
UDP/RTP:
Green: Detected
Grey: Not detected
Bit-rate of TS from Ethernet input.
Bit-rate actually used by the modulator.
Received transmission format.
Ethernet input lock status indicator. The input Transport Stream is
locked when no more than two consecutive Sync Byte are missed.
Input GbE overflow alarm status. This alarm condition occurs when
the input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation (Ref. to
ETSI EN 302 755).
RTP packets source clock reference.
Zero when the input is not selected
Equal to the total bit-rate, when
Delete Null Packets disabled
Less than total bit-rate, when Delete
Null Packets enabled
188 Bytes
204 Bytes
Green: Lock
Grey: Not locked
Red: Alarm on
Grey: Alarm off
90 kHz
27 MHz
10 Mbit//s
100 Mbit//s
1 Gbit/s
Total amount of frames delivered to the higher-level protocol.
Ethernet connection speed. No duplex information is provided.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 89 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Parameter / Control
Description
GbE 1 / 2 Statistic
GbE Bad Pck
The number of inbound packets that contained errors.
Community
Get
Read community setting.
Community
Set
Set community setting.
Community
Trap
Trap community setting.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
Enable send frame
Channel 1/2 Ethernet transmission enabling.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
IP
Channel 1/2 Ethernet transmission IP address.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
Port
Port used for RTP/UDP data transmission
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
Status
Ethernet transmission on channel 1/2 status indicator.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
Destination MAC
Destination MAC address.
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
SSRC
SSRC identifier of the RTP transmission on channel ½.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Checked: Enabled
Not checked: Disabled
Min: 0
Max: 65,535
Resolving IP Addr.
IP not found
No entry
Transmitting data
Transmitting data multicast
ON
OFF
Page 90 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx
Parameter / Control
TS Pck per Frame
Frame type
TS Format
RTP Clock
Version 1.1
Description
Number of packets per frame.
Transmission protocol selector.
Transmission format.
RTP packets clock reference.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: 1
Max: 7
RTP
UDP
188 Bytes
204 Bytes
90 kHz
27 MHz
Page 91 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.12 GPS
Click on GPS button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the GPS received statistics window.
Figure 39.
Version 1.1
GPS window
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 92 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 20.
Box
Parameter / Control
GPS window
Description
General
GPS Software
Version
The firmware version of the GPS module.
Satellite
#Number of Visible
sat
Number of visible GPS satellites indicator.
Satellite
#Number of Tracked
sat
Number of tracked GPS satellites indicator.
Satellite
Ublox GPS Lock
Ublox GPS Lock status. This LED shows the GPS lock status
derived from live data provided by the GPS receiver through a
proprietary protocol.
Position
Latitude (°)
Site latitude expressed in degrees.
Position
Longitude (°)
Site longitude expressed in degrees.
Admitted Ranges / Values
Green: GPS Locked
Red: GPS Not Locked
Current time indicator.
Date & Time
UTC Time
Each GPS satellite has an atomic clock and continually transmits
messages containing the current time and date at the start of the
message sent by the GPS itself.
Current date indicator.
Date & Time
UTC Date
Version 1.1
Each GPS satellite has an atomic clock and continually transmits
messages containing the current time and date at the start of the
message send by the GPS itself.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 93 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.12.1 Holdover Management
The ARK6 includes a holdover function provided by a higher grade Oven-Controlled Crystal Oscillator.
Figure 40.
Holdover Management
The ARK6 is equipped with an internal OCXO for improved phase noise and stability. The system is
provided with internal 10MHz and 1PPS signals which are disciplined to the GPS time signal or to the
10MHz and 1PPS external references. The stability of internal frequency and phase is assured by the
highly stable OCXO. If the satellites signal, from the GPS receiver, or the external reference sources are
completely lost, the Holdover mode enables the unit to keep working with internal 10MHz and 1PPS for
the duration of the Holdover Timeout, with very low drift over time. If the timeout period elapses prior
to regain the lock of the selected clock reference source and the Holdover function is enabled, the alarm
“Holdover” is raised.
Depending on the conditions, the Holdover function can work in one of the following state:
1.
2.
3.
Version 1.1
Holdover OFF
Condition 1: the clock reference is changed and the OCXO is not locked yet.
Condition 2: the input clock reference is not present.
Associated event: “Holdover OFF”-
SFN Ready
Condition: the OCXO is locked to the selected frequency reference and the
system is waiting for the OCXO stabilization.
Associated event: “Holdover SFN Ready”.
Holdover Ready
Condition 1: the OCXO is stable and the Holdover function is now available.
Condition 2: the system quit the Holdover mode because the OCXO regain the
lock to the selected clock reference.
Associated event: “Holdover Ready”.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 94 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
4.
5.
Version 1.1
Holdover ON
Condition: if the OCXO is no more locked to the selected frequency reference
and the Holdover function is enabled and available, the equipment enters into
holdover mode.
Associated event: “Holdover ON”.
Holdover TMO Expired
Condition: the Holdover state is “Holdover ON” (the function is enabled) and
the Holdover timeout period elapses prior to regain the lock of the selected
clock reference source.
Associated event: “Holdover TMO Expired”.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 95 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 21.
Box
General
GPS window: Holdover Management
Parameter / Control
Fine Frequency
Adjust
Description
Internal frequency reference fine tuning setting. It is possible to
increase and decrease the frequency offset of the OCXO with
reference to the 10MHz clock by 1/21 Hz steps using the Fine
Frequency Adjust. This field is accessible only if the Frequency
Reference selector is set to Internal
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min: 0
Max: 1,048,575
The saved DAC value during the stabilization process of the OCXO.
It represents the last saved frequency offset of the OCXO,
expressed in 1/21 Hz steps, with respect to the selected frequency
reference source.
Using External or GPS as frequency reference, the last saved Data
to Flash value will be:
General
Data to Flash
retained after a software reset;
Min: 0
reinitialized to zero after a hardware reset (unit powered
down and powered back up).
Max: 1,048,575
Red: Not Locked
Green: Locked
Red: Not Locked
Green: Locked
Using Internal as frequency reference, the last saved Data to Flash
value will be overwritten with the Fine Frequency Adjust value after:
OCXO
OCXO
10MHz Lock
1PPS lock
Version 1.1
a software reset;
an hardware reset;
setting to Internal the frequency reference.
Shows the lock status of the OCXO to the external 10MHz
reference.
Shows the lock status of the OCXO to the external 1PPS reference.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 96 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
OCXO
OCXO
OCXO
OCXO
OCXO
Parameter / Control
GPS Lock
Tracking
SFN Ready
Holdover Ready
Holdover
Holdover
Management
Holdover Enable
Holdover
Management
Holdover Timeout [h]
Holdover
Management
Status
Version 1.1
Description
OCXO locked to the external GPS reference.
It shows whenever the OCXO is not locked to the selected
frequency reference or not.
It shows whenever the OCXO is locked to the selected frequency
reference and the system is waiting for the OCXO stabilization or
not.
It shows whenever the Holdover function is available or not.
It notifies that the equipment entered into Holdover mode
Enables the Holdover mechanism.
Sets the timeout of the Holdover in hour.
The status of the Holdover mechanism.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Green: Locked
Grey: Not Locked
Green: Locked
Grey: Not Locked
Green: SFN Ready
Grey: SFN Not Ready
Green: Holdover Ready
Grey: Holdover Not Ready
Green: Holdover On
Grey: Holdover Off
Checked: Enabled
Not checked: Disabled
Min: 0 h
Max: 24 h
OFF
SFN Ready
Ready
ON
Expired
Page 97 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Box
Holdover
Management
Parameter / Control
Timeout Status
Version 1.1
Description
The countdown of the Holdover timeout.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Admitted Ranges / Values
Min:00:00:00
Max: “Holdover Timeout [s]”
Page 98 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°
5.13 Alarms
Click on Alarms button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the alarms management window.
Figure 41.
Alarms window
The Alarms window allows the setting of alarm masks and the monitoring of alarms status. Use alarm
masks to select how and which alarm have to be notified.
Masks are organized in columns. The twelve columns represent twelve destinations of each alarm
notification:
GUI: the selected alarms status is notified on the Java alarm page icon.
LCD: the selected alarms status is notified on LCD display lighting the alarm button and listing
the alarms in the Alarms menu.
Event: the selected alarms status generate an alarm event that will be logged in the event
memory (refer to Events paragraph).
RELAY0…3: the selected alarms switch on the corresponding relay.
T1…T3: the selected alarms generate the corresponding trap messages (refer to Network
paragraph to set destination IP addresses).
RF: the selected alarms switch off the output RF signal. The RF mask is almost entirely fixed in
order to avoid device damages or malfunctioning.
SWITCH: the selected alarms trigger the automatic input switching, if enabled.
In the Alarms window, when an alarm condition occurs, the relative alarm is red highlighted. The Total
check boxes enable all alarms-to-masks associations.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 99 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 22.
Alarm
Temperature
Absolute High
Temperature Alarm (3dB)
Temperature Warning
Alarms window
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Case temperature over 75°C, the maximum
endurable limit.
Temperature level goes over the alarm
threshold.
The output power is consequently lowered by
3 dB (always within the admitted power
range).
Check alarm and warning thresholds
Lower the output power to decrease internal
temperature
Check the device airflow
Check fans
Temperature level goes over the warning
threshold.
Check fans connections
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
Fans Speed Low
One of the fans speed is under the minimum
speed level (2,000 rpm).
Verify that fans are not damaged; in this case
substitute them. The substitution can be
performed during device normal operations
Alim Dialog Err
Communication errors between the main
board and the power supply board.
Hardware fault
FE Dialog Err
Communication errors between the main
board and the Front-End board.
Hardware fault
Meas Dialog Err
Communication errors between the main
board and the Measure board.
Hardware fault
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 100 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
GPS signal is not locked by either the OCXO
or the GPS receiver.
GPS Not Locked
The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when
GPS is not used as clock reference or when
the GPS Communication Error is raised.
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
Check cable and GPS antenna connections
Hardware fault
Hardware fault
In SFN configuration, when selected TS input
or MIP are not detected, 120 MHz oscillator
can lose the lock
Communication errors between main board
and
GPS Dialog Err
GPS board.
The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when
GPS is not used as clock reference.
120 MHz is not locked.
120MHz Not Locked
The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when
the Signal 10 MHz Not Locked alarm is raised
or when GPS is used as clock reference and
GPS alarm (GPS Not Locked, GPS Dialog
Err) is raised.
Hardware fault
960MHz Not Locked
960 MHz is not locked.
Hardware fault
Input PLL Not Locked
Input PLL not locked alarm
Hardware fault
Output PLL Not
Locked
Output PLL not locked alarm
Hardware fault
Bad File In File
System
One or more of the following files are not
present in the File System:
Check files list
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 101 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
10MHz Not Locked
Description and limitations
*.cfg
*.jar
*.drlin
*.def
*.ochf
*.pwr2
*.fpga6
*.sav
*.snmp
*.cdef2
*.htm
*.gpsf
Troubleshooting
Reload the file system
If the frequency reference is Internal: OCXO
fault
If the frequency reference is External:
10 MHz is not locked.
Version 1.1
OCXO fault
Lack of external 10 MHz
Hardware fault
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
If the frequency reference is GPS:
Check GPS alarms
OCXO fault
Hardware fault
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 102 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
1PPS Not Locked
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
If the frequency reference is Internal: OCXO
fault
If the frequency reference is External:
1PPS is not locked to the selected frequency
reference.
FPGA Boot alarm
FPGA boot has not been successfully
completed.
OCXO fault
Lack of external 1PPS
Hardware fault
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
If the frequency reference is GPS:
Check GPS alarms
OCXO fault
Hardware fault
Restart the machine
Reload the file system
Forward Power High
FWD power goes over the maximum
endurable limit.
Hardware fault
Forward Power Low
Warning
FWD power level goes over the warning
threshold.
Check alarm and warning thresholds
Forward Power Low
Alarm
FWD power level goes over the alarm
threshold.
At every amplifier initialization the FWD power
alarm and warning are temporary on
Amplifier is not properly working, hardware fault
Reflex Power High
RFL power goes over the set power -9 dB.
Check the RF output for disconnection or
wrong impendence adaptation
File System Error
File System loading error.
File system partition damage
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 103 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
PS Voltage Out Of
Range
PS Current Out Of
Range
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Power Supply voltage out of range. This
alarm is risen when at least one of the
following conditions is met:
PS 26V < 24V or > 28V
PS1/PS2 50V < 45V or > 55V
Power Supply current out of range. This alarm
is risen when at least one of the following
conditions is met:
PS Current 26V > 8A
PS1/PS2 Current 50V> 18A
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
Hardware fault
Hardware fault
CPU Fan Error
CPU fan speed equal to zero or CPU fan not
connected.
Check fan connection
Test Mode
The equipment is generating a test signal.
Disable the test signal
FE S2 Not Locked
Lock state indicator of the satellite feed.
Check input signal and cable
FE S2 S/N Low
Front-End S/N measure goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
FE S2 BER High
Front-End BER measure goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
FE S2 Global Alarm
[DVB-T2] No Input
Selected TS input not locked.
Version 1.1
Check input cable
Check input statistics
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
T2
Page 104 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
[DVB-T2] Input
Overflow
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Selected TS input overflow.
Check the capability of the current modulation
scheme
Check if the configuration has been loaded
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
T2
[DVB-T2] FE Not
Locked
Logical AND between FE TS lock and FE
demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to 6).
Check input signal and cable
T2
[DVB-T2] FE Squelch
Front-End Squelch level goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
T2
[DVB-T2] FE Pre
LDPC BER High
Front-End Pre LDPC BER goes over the
alarm threshold.
Check input signal and cable
T2
[DVB-T2] FE SNR
Low
Front-End SNR goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
T2
[DVB-T2] FE MER
Low
Front-End MER goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
T2
[DVB-T2] FE Signal
Quality Low
Front-End Signal Quality goes under the
alarm threshold.
Check input signal and cable
T2
[DVB-T2] MEAS Not
Locked
Logical AND between Meas TS lock and
Meas demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to
6).
Check the configuration
T2
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[DVB-T2] MEAS Pre
LDPC BER High
Measure Pre LDPC BER goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check the configuration
T2
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[DVB-T2] MEAS SNR
Low
Measure SNR goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check the configuration
T2
Check if the configuration has been loaded
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 105 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
[DVB-T2] MEAS MER
Low
Measure MER goes under the alarm
threshold.
[DVB-T2] MEAS
Signal Quality Low
Measure Signal Quality goes under the alarm
threshold.
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
T2
T2
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
Check input signal
T2
The logical OR of the following conditions:
CRC of incoming T2-MI pkts is not
correct.
The Network mode is SFN but the
selected Parameters Source is not T2-MI
Parameters.
[DVB-T2] T2-MI Err
[DVB-T2] T2-MIP Err
T2-MIP errors
Check input signal
T2
[DVB-T2] Holdover
An alarm that is raised when the Holdover
function is enabled and the set timeout period
elapsed prior to regain the lock of the
frequency reference.
Check input frequency reference source.
T2
[DVB-T2] PPS Phase
1PPS is not lock to a source reference
common to the network. This alarm is
available only when the frequency reference
is external.
Check 1PPS
T2
Hardware fault
[DVB-T2]
Configuration Not
Loaded
Some configuration parameters have been
changed and the current configuration has not
been loaded yet.
Load the configuration through the Load Config
button in DVB-T2 Processing window
T2
[DVB-T2] FE LDPC
Mean Err
RF input LDPC iteration per minute goes over
the alarm threshold.
Check input signal
T2
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 106 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
[DVB-T2] MEAS
LDPC Mean Err
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
RF output LDPC iteration per minute goes
over the alarm threshold.
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
Check input signal
T2
Check input signal
T2
Check connection status of physical input
associated to logic input
One or both Seamless logic input of the
current mode isn’t locked.
Check type and source of input associated to
logic input
This alarm is enable only in Tx DVBT mode
Hardware fault
The logical OR of the following conditions:
[DVB-T2] SFN Alarm
T2-MI Timestamp error.
T2-MI Timestamp wrong CRC.
T2-MI Timestamp not present.
The Holdover status is either OFF or
TMO Expired.
The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when
the [DVB-T2] T2-MI Err alarm is on and when
the Network mode is MFN.
Seamless improper working warning
[DVB-T] Input Not
present Alarm
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 107 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
Seamless improper working warning
An error has been detected on Logical
seamless input. The possible errors which
may be detected on input are:
[DVB-T] Input Not
valid Alarm
PAT error
MIP error
TS synchronization
Check input signal
Packet jitter
Check cable connection status
Transport error
Hardware fault
ASI word error
Check cable connections
Check Network delay
Hardware Fault
Check input cable
Check input statistics
Check the capability of the current modulation
scheme
When the alarm is detected, an event (if event
mask is enabled on alarm mask) shows the
cause of the error. The cause shown is only
one, and it is the heaviest one. The priority in
the errors is as previously listed (the heaviest
error cause is the one listed in the bottom of
the list, and so on).
Seamless improper working warning
[DVB-T] MIP Delay
High
[DVB-T] No Input
[DVB-T] Input
Overflow
This alarm is high when the MIP in one of the
seamless inputs of the current mode, is not in
its expected position. This can be caused by a
too high delay on the input.
Selected TS input not locked. It could be
either ASI or Tuner input.
Selected TS input overflow.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 108 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
MIP packets missing. This alarm’s RF OFF
mask should always be enabled.
Alarm raising limitations:
Check input signal
Check 1PPS
Hardware fault
Seamless improper working warning
Check cable connections
This alarm is high when the Network delay is
greater than the Maximum delay or when the
internal counter, used to compute the System
delay is not locked to 1PPS. This alarm shall
always be enabled in the RF Off alarm mask.
Check Network delay
Check 1PPS
Hardware Fault
[DVB-T] FE Not
Locked
Logical AND between FE TS lock and FE
demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to 6).
Check input signal and cable
[DVB-T] FE Squelch
Front-End Squelch level goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
[DVB-T] FE Pre
Viterbi BER High
Front-End Pre Viterbi BER goes over the
alarm threshold.
Check input signal and cable
[DVB-T] FE SNR Low
Front-End SNR goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
[DVB-T] MIP Err
The monitoring of this alarm is enabled only
when the device has SFN modulation
enabled.
The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when
a No Input alarm is raised.
[DVB-T] PPS Phase
[DVB-T] SFN Alarm
1PPS is not lock to a source reference
common to the network. This alarm is
available only when the frequency reference
is external.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 109 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
[DVB-T] FE MER Low
Front-End MER goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
[DVB-T] FE Signal
Quality Low
Front-End Signal Quality goes under the
alarm threshold.
Check input signal and cable
[DVB-T] MEAS Not
Locked
Logical AND between Meas TS lock and
Meas demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to
6).
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[DVB-T] MEAS Pre
Viterbi BER High
Measure Pre Viterbi BER goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[DVB-T] MEAS SNR
Low
Measure SNR goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[DVB-T] MEAS MER
Low
Measure MER goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[DVB-T] MEAS Signal
Quality Low
Measure Signal Quality goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[DVB-T] Holdover
An alarm that is raised when the Holdover
function is enabled and the set timeout period
elapsed prior to regain the lock of the
frequency reference.
Check input frequency reference source.
[ITU] No video input
Selected input not locked.
Check input cable
ITU
Check input statistics
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 110 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
ITU
ITU
[ISDB-T] Input Error
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] IIP
Modulation Error
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] System
delay
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] IIP SFN
error
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] Network
delay
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
[ITU] Input Wrong
Standard
Selected Input video standard (525 or 625
lines) not compatible with the ARK6 definition
standard.
[ITU] Holdover
An alarm that is raised when the Holdover
function is enabled and the set timeout period
elapsed prior to regain the lock of the
frequency reference.
[ISDB-T] 1PPS Phase
[ISDB-T] Rate error
Layer A
1PPS is not lock to a common reference of
the network. This alarm is available only when
the frequency reference is external.
The layer Rate alarm is on when the layer
input bitrate is over/under the expected
bitrate.
Expected bit-rate depends on modulation
parameter setting
Version 1.1
Check input format
Check input statistics
Check input frequency reference source.
Check 1PPS
Hardware fault
Check input bitrate
Check modulation parameter setting
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 111 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
[ISDB-T] Rate error
Layer B
[ISDB-T] Rate error
Layer C
[ISDB-T] Table
Overflow Layer A
[ISDB-T] Table
Overflow Layer B
[ISDB-T] Table
Overflow Layer C
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
The layer Rate alarm is on when the layer
input bitrate is over/under the expected
bitrate.
Expected bit-rate depends on modulation
parameter setting
The layer Rate alarm is on when the layer
input bitrate is over/under the expected
bitrate.
Expected bit-rate depends on modulation
parameter setting
Table NOT inserted before next request to
insert arrive
Table NOT inserted before next request to
insert arrive
Table NOT inserted before next request to
insert arrive
[ISDB-T] MEAS not
locked
Check input bitrate
Check modulation parameter setting
Check input bitrate
Check modulation parameter setting
Check the Table Bitrate
Check input Bitrate
Check modulation parameter setting
Check the Table Bitrate
Check input Bitrate
Check modulation parameter setting
Check the Table Bitrate
Check input Bitrate
Check modulation parameter setting
Check the configuration
Check if the configuration has been loaded
[ISDB-T] MEAS CN
Low
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
Page 112 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
[ISDB-T] MEAS MER
Layer A
Measure MER goes under the alarm
threshold.
[ISDB-T] MEAS MER
Layer B
Measure MER goes under the alarm
threshold.
[ISDB-T] MEAS MER
Layer C
Measure MER goes under the alarm
threshold.
[ISDB-T] MEAS PreViterbi BER High
Layer A
Measure Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm
threshold.
[ISDB-T] MEAS PreViterbi BER High
Layer B
Measure Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm
threshold.
[ISDB-T] MEAS PreViterbi BER High
Layer C
Measure Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm
threshold.
[ISDB-T] FE Not
Locked
[ISDB-T] FE Squelch
Check the configuration
Hardware fault
Check the configuration
Hardware fault
Check the configuration
Hardware fault
Check the configuration
Hardware fault
Check the configuration
Hardware fault
Check the configuration
Hardware fault
Front-End Squelch level goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
[ISDB-T] FE CN Low
[ISDB-T] FE MER
Layer A
Front-End MER goes over the alarm
threshold.
Version 1.1
Check input signal and cable
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
Page 113 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
[ISDB-T] FE MER
Layer B
Front-End MER goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] FE MER
Layer C
Front-End MER goes over the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal and cable
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] FE PreViterbi BER High
Layer A
Front-End Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the
alarm threshold.
Check input signal and cable
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] FE PreViterbi BER High
Layer B
Front-End Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the
alarm threshold.
Check input signal and cable
ISDB-T
[ISDB-T] FE PreViterbi BER High
Layer C
Front-End Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the
alarm threshold.
Check input signal and cable
ISDB-T
ISDB-T
ATSC
[ISDB-T] FE
Emergency Flag
[ATSC] No Input
Selected input is not present. It could be
either ASI or Tuner input.
Check input cable
Check input statistics
[ATSC] Input
Overflow
Selected TS input overflow.
Check input signal
ATSC
[ATSC] MH Err
MH error.
Check input signal
ATSC
[ATSC] MEAS
Demodulator Not
Locked
ATSC demodulator of the Measure board not
locked.
Check the configuration
ATSC
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 114 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description and limitations
Troubleshooting
Mode(2)
RF mask (1)
[ATSC] MEAS SNR
Low
Measure SNR goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check the configuration
ATSC
[ATSC] FE
Demodulator Not
Locked
ATSC demodulator of the Front-End board
not locked.
Check input signal
ATSC
[ATSC] FE SNR Low
Front-End SNR goes under the alarm
threshold.
Check input signal
ATSC
[ATSC] No TVCT
Input TVCT table not present.
Check input signal
ATSC
Notes to the table:
(1)
0/1 stands for disabled/enabled and is fixed, X stands for not fixed.
(2)
C stands for Common alarm. T2/T/ATSC/ITU/ISDB-T specifies the mode the alarm belongs to. Alarms are divided in two different classes: common
alarms and mode-specific alarms.
Common alarms are those which are HW dependant or are dependent on how the operating system has been designed. Common alarms are
shared by all the operational modes.
Mode-specific alarms are those which depend on the implemented functionalities and standards. Mode-specific alarms can be easily recognized
thanks to the addition of the mode prefix enclosed in squared brackets.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 115 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.14 Events
Click on Events button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the events windows.
Figure 42.
Events window
Open the Events window to slide the events list.
Events are reported with the following information:
Time: event detection time.
Date: event detection date.
Type: type of event:
Version 1.1
Alarm;
Command;
Event;
System Init.
Description: event description:
if the event type is Alarm: which alarm generated the event followed by “ON” or
“OFF”;
if the event type is Command: the low level code and command source;
if the event type is Event: event description;
if the event type is System Init: system initialization, followed by the alarm in case of
error.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 116 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Each event type is characterized by a different colour, the following list explain the mean of each colour:
Red: alarm (refer to alarms list in Alarms paragraph and to Alarms list table);
Green: command (See ARK6_SW_Reference manual_v1_0.doc for further information);
Blue: system Init (refer to System Initialization Event paragraph);
Black:
Event (refer to Events list table);
TASK_ERR (refer to Task Error Event paragraph);
SYS_ERR (refer to System Error Event paragraph).
Use the following buttons, sited on the right side of the window, to manage the Events list:
Clear: resets the events list.
Get History: gets all the stored events from the last board reset (max 512 events).
Table 23.
Description-Event
Events descriptions list
Event Description
RF OFF enabled from OPTO
RF output switched off through OPTO 0.
RF OFF dis. from OPTO
RF output switched on through OPTO 0.
Stand-by ON from OPTO
Stand-by mode enabled through OPTO 3.
Stand-by ON from LCD
Stand-by mode enabled through LCD button or OPTO 3.
Stand-by ON CPU Fan Err
Stand-by mode enabled because of a CPU Fan error.
Stand-by OFF
Stand-by mode disabled through LCD button.
Power = xx.x dBm (Local)
Update file *.xxxx
P5K open: xx.xx.xx.xx
P5K closed
File system busy
Mode = (mode)
UTC Time set from GPS
Version 1.1
New output power setting.
xx.x: output power expressed in dBm.
New file loading.
xxxx: file extension.
Connection to port 5000 open.
xx.xx.xx.xx: host IP address.
Connection to port 5000 closed.
File system already in use while trying to employ it (e.g. change mode
during a file loading).
Manual change mode.
mode:
"OFF",
"ISDBT",
"ITU",
"DVB-T",
"ATSC",
"DVB-T2",
"ECHO",
"Rep. Analog",
"Rep. Digital".
Time and date set by GPS. As soon as the GPS lock is regained,
once lost, and if the current time and date are different from the GPS
ones, the UTC time is set by GPS.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 117 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Description-Event
PS Restart N
PS OFF
Restart Amp. from OPTO
Event Description
This event is reported when one of the following alarms is raised:
PS1/2 50V voltage out range
PS1/2 50V current out of range
The fourth time one of the preceding alarms is raised the amplifier is
restarted (from 1 up to 4 times).
N: number of amplifier restarting.
Only in SDTX 201 and 501 versions.
After the fourth time the amplifier has been restarted, if an alarm
condition causing a PS Restart event occurs, PS OFF event is
reported and the amplifier is turned off
When this event is reported amplifier can be turned on only by OPTO
2 or by the Restart button in the Output window (only in SDTX 201
and 501 versions).
This event is reported when the retry command is given by the Retry
Alarm OPTO (OPTO 2).
PS ON
This event is reported at every amplifier restarting
Events List cleared
This event is reported when the events list is cleared.
Updating string fw...
FPGA firmware err xx
This event is reported when the update of the FPGA firmware starts.
String values:
"ISDBT",
"ITU",
"DVB-T",
"ATSC",
"DVB-T2",
"ECHO",
"Rep. Analog",
"Rep. Digital".
This event is reported when an error occurs during the update of the
FPGA firmware.
xx: error code:
0x10, 0x20, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03: programming error;
0x11: firmware not found in FS (for the current mode);
0x22: FPGA file opening error;
0x33: FPGA file reading error;
0x44: erasing FLASH memory block error.
FPGA firmware OK
New FPGA firmware successfully loaded.
Saving config…
Saving configuration task started (after the command “s” given by
RS232 or GbE commands).
Save config Finished
Saving configuration task correctly ended.
Save config error: xx
Pwr adjusted to xx.x dBm
Version 1.1
An error occurs during saving configuration.
xx: error code:
0x80: File system busy;
0x01: New *.sav file opening error;
0x02: uC header writing error;
0x03: uC data writing error;
0x04: FPGA header writing error;
0x05: FPGA data writing error;
0x07: File date writing error;
0x08: Old *.sav file deleting error
0x09: New file naming error (deleting of “*”);
0x0A: File date writing error it can’t be found into the FS
0x10: file already opened.
New output power setting due to a set value exceeding the mode
specific power range.
xx.x: output power expressed in dBm.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 118 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Description-Event
In. AUTO switch to string
Forced = mode
Event Description
When Input Select Mode is set on Autoswitch and the selected input
is not locked the device switch to the next available locked input (refer
to Task Error Event paragraph) and this event is generated.
string:
ASI1
ASI2
ASI3
ASI4
Tuner
RxCh1
RxCh2
If the device is in Mode A and the selected working mode is disabled
by default (as established in the MODE_DIS field of the *.def file), the
next available working mode is forced.
mode:
"ISDBT",
"ITU",
"DVB-T",
"ATSC",
"DVB-T2",
"ECHO",
"Rep. Analog",
"Rep. Digital".
Forced Ch In A= string
Channel input.
Forced ChOut A= string
Channel output.
Forced reset for IIC err
An IIC error forced the board reset.
=>string err status
ERR on delete file ‘string‘
Delete file ‘string‘
Init FS date
Error init FS date xx
Error on delete *.string
S1/S2 changed, P1 loading
Saving drlin …
Saving drlin Finished
Version 1.1
It notifies witch file generated the Bad file in File System alarm.
string: file extension
status: ON or OFF
After a FS file update the old file is renamed and then deleted. This
event is reported when the deletion of the old file during the system
initialization does not succeed.
string: file extension.
FS file deleted.
string: file extension.
This event is reported once time and date table of the File System is
initialized for the first time.
An error occurs during FS initialization.
xx: error code:
0x01: EEPROM data reading error;
0x02: EEPROM data writing error;
0x03: CRC error in time and date table.
FS file deleting error.
string: file extension.
Automatic update of P1 symbol. This event is reported at every
system initialization and, in T2-MI mode, when S1 and S2 fields of
incoming T2-MI pkts change.
Saving linear coefficients task started (after the command “p2” given
by RS232 or GbE commands).
Saving linear coefficients task correctly ended.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 119 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Description-Event
Save drlin err: xx
Event Description
An error occurs during saving linear precorrection coefficients.
xx: error code:
0x80: File system busy;
0x01: New *.drlin file opening error;
0x02: number of coefficients information writing error;
0x03: linear coefficients writing error;
0x07: File date writing error;
0x08: Old *.drlin file deleting error
0x09: New file naming error (deleting of “*”);
0x10: file already opened;
0x0A: File date writing error it can’t be found into the FS.
New T2MI PID N
New T2-MI PID found by the Automatic T2-MI PID Mode mechanism.
IIC Error
IIC bus error
DVB-T2 params err xx
Re-start mode
DVB-T2 preset err xx
RFL Power Warning
RFL Power OK
RFL Power Alarm
RFL RF ON ”N”
T2-MI Autodetect PID OK
T2MI PID PAT Err
T2-MI PID Not Valid
T2MI PID PMT Err
T2-MI PID Not Found
Freq Ref Forced: GPS
Freq Ref set to string
Version 1.1
An error occurs during T2 parameters loading.
xx: error code:
0x01: P1 symbol loading error;
0x02: P1 symbol loading error due to a not valid T2-MI input.
When DVB-T2 params err 01 occurs during T2 parameters loading,
the FPGA firmware is reloaded and this event is generated.
An error occurs during T2 preset configuration loading.
xx: error code:
0x80: File system busy;
0x01: *.t2cfg file opening error;
0x02: *.t2cfg file header reading error;
0x03: the selected configuration is corrupted;
0x04: preset configuration data too big;
0x05: memory allocation error;
0x06: *.t2cfg file header reading error;
0x09: *.t2cfg file not found;
0x10: the selected configuration is not present.
RFL power goes over the alarm threshold for the first time and the
“Number of attempts” is different from zero.
RFL power goes under the alarm threshold.
RFL power goes over the alarm threshold for N times, where N is the
number of attempts specified in the Output page of the Java GUI.
When RFL power goes over the alarm threshold the system switch off
and on the output RF signal for a maximum number of times. N is the
current number of attempt.
The Automatic T2-MI PID detection has been put across
During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, PAT has not been found in
the input Transport Stream.
During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, no PIDs with stream type
x06 has been found in the PMT.
During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, more than one PID with
stream type x06 has been found in the PMT.
During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, the detected T2-MI PID has
not been found in the input Transport Stream
If the Network mode is SFN but the clock reference is set to Internal,
the frequency reference is automatically forced to GPS and this event
is generated.
Event generated at every new Frequency Reference selection.
string: the clock reference
External
Internal
GPS
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 120 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Description-Event
Holdover OFF
Holdover SFN Ready
Holdover Ready
Holdover ON
Holdover TMO Expired
Fan N Speed string
Event Description
Condition 1: the clock reference is changed and the OCXO is not
locked yet.
Condition 2: the input clock reference is not present.
The OCXO is locked to the selected frequency reference and the
system is waiting for the OCXO stabilization.
Condition 1: the OCXO is stable and the Holdover function is now
available.
Condition 2: the system quit the Holdover mode because the OCXO
regain the lock to the selected clock reference.
If the OCXO is no more locked to the selected frequency reference
and the Holdover function is enabled and available, the equipment
enters in holdover mode.
Condition: the Holdover state is “ON” (the function is enabled) and the
Holdover timeout period elapses prior to regain the lock of the
selected clock reference source.
It notifies which fan caused the Fans Speed Low alarm.
string:
Low;
OK
Updating GPS fw…
This event is reported when the update of the GPS firmware starts.
GPS firmware err xx
This event is reported when an error occurs during the update of the
GPS firmware.
xx: error code:
0x80: File system busy;
0x01: firmware not found in FS (for the current mode);
0x02: GPS file opening error;
0x03: GPS file reading error;
0x06:GPS fw transferring into buffer error.
GPS firmware OK
New GPS firmware successfully loaded.
Updating GPS fw (NILL)…
When an error occurs during the update of the GPS firmware, the
system reloads the Nill firmware prior to attempt another update.
The following table lists the descriptions of all the alarm type events (refer to Alarms paragraph for
further information about alarms).
Table 24.
Alarms descriptions list
Alarm
Description-Alarm
Temperature Absolute High
Temp. High
Temperature Alarm (-3dB)
Temp. High -3dB
Temperature Warning
Temp. High Warning
Fans Speed Low
Fans Speed Low
Alim Dialog Err
Alim Dialog Err
FE Dialog Err
FE Dialog Err
Meas Dialog Err
Meas Dialog Err
GPS Dialog Err
GPS Dialog Err
GPS Not Locked
GPS Not Locked
120MHz Not Locked
120MHz Not Locked
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 121 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description-Alarm
960MHz Not Locked
960MHz Not Locked
Input PLL Not Locked
Input PLL Not Locked
Output PLL Not Locked
Out PLL Not Locked
10MHz Not Locked
10MHz Not Locked
1PPS Not Locked
1PPS Not Locked
FPGA Boot Error
FPGA Boot Err
Forward Power High
FWD Power High
Forward Power Low Warning
FWD Pwr Low Warning
Forward Power Low Alarm
FWD Pwr Low
Reflex Power High
Reflex Power High
File System Error
File System Err
Bad File In File System
File Err
PS Voltage Out Of Range
PS1 V Out Of Range
PS Current Out Of Range
PS1 I Out Of Range
CPU Fan Error
CPU Fan Error
Test Mode
Test Mode
FE S2 Not Locked
FE S2 not locked
FE S2 S/N Low
FE S2 SNR Low
FE S2 BER High
FE S2 BER high
FE S2 Global Alarm
[DVB-T2] No Input
No Input
[DVB-T2] Input Overflow
Input overflow
[DVB-T2] FE Not Locked
FE Not Locked
[DVB-T2] FE Squelch
FE Squelch
[DVB-T2] FE Pre LDPC BER High
FE Pre LDPC BER
[DVB-T2] FE SNR Low
FE SNR Low
[DVB-T2] FE MER Low
FE MER Low
[DVB-T2] FE Signal Quality Low
FE S.Quality Low
[DVB-T2] MEAS Not Locked
Meas Not Locked
[DVB-T2] MEAS Pre LDPC BER High
Meas Pre LDPC BER
[DVB-T2] MEAS SNR Low
Meas SNR Low
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 122 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description-Alarm
[DVB-T2] MEAS MER Low
Meas MER Low
[DVB-T2] MEAS Signal Quality Low
Meas S.Quality Low
[DVB-T2] T2-MI Err
T2-MI Err
[DVB-T2] T2-MIP Err
T2-MIP Err
[DVB-T2] Holdover
Holdover
[DVB-T2] PPS Phase
PPS Phase
[DVB-T2] Configuration Not Loaded
Cfg. Not Loaded
[DVB-T2] FE LDPC Mean Err
FE LDPC Mean Err
[DVB-T2] MEAS LDPC Mean Err
MEAS LDPC Mean Err
SFN Alarm code
[DVB-T2] SFN Alarm
code:
Bit[0]: the Holdover function is enabled and the OCXO
is not locked yet
Bit[1]: the Timestamp is not present
Bit[2]: wrong Timestamp CRC
Bit[3]: wrong Timestamp
Bit[4]: SFN Resynch
[DVB-T] Input Not Present
Input not present
[DVB-T] Input Not valid Alarm
Input not valid
[DVB-T] MIP Delay High
MIP delay high
[DVB-T] No Input
Input not detected
[DVB-T] Input Overflow
Input overflow
[DVB-T] MIP Err
MIP error
[DVB-T] PPS Phase
PPS phase wrong
[DVB-T] SFN Alarm
SFN Alarm
[DVB-T] FE Not Locked
FE Not Locked
[DVB-T] FE Squelch
FE Squelch
[DVB-T] FE Pre Viterbi BER High
FE Pre Vit BER
[DVB-T] FE SNR Low
FE SNR Low
[DVB-T] FE MER Low
FE MER Low
[DVB-T] FE Signal Quality Low
FE S.Quality Low
[DVB-T] MEAS Not Locked
Meas Not Locked
[DVB-T] MEAS Pre Viterbi BER High
Meas Pre Vit BER
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 123 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description-Alarm
[DVB-T] MEAS SNR Low
Meas SNR Low
[DVB-T] MEAS MER Low
Meas MER Low
[DVB-T] MEAS Signal Quality Low
Meas S.Quality Low
[DVB-T] Holdover
Holdover
[ITU] No Video Input
Input not detect
[ITU] Input wrong format
Wrong standard
[ITU] Holdover
Holdover
[ISDB-T] Input Error
Input not valid
[ISDB-T] IIP Modulation Error
IIP error
[ISDB-T] 1PPS Phase
PPS phase wrong
[ISDB-T] System delay
System delay alarm
[ISDB-T] IIP SFN error
IIP SFN err
[ISDB-T] Network delay
Network Delay
[ISDB-T] Rate error Layer A
Layer A Err Rate
[ISDB-T] Rate error Layer B
Layer B Err Rate
[ISDB-T] Rate error Layer C
Layer C Err Rate
[ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer A
Lay A Table ovfl
[ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer B
Lay B Table ovfl
[ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer C
Lay C Table ovfl
[ISDB-T] MEAS not locked
Meas Not Locked
[ISDB-T] MEAS CN Low
Meas C/N Low
[ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer A
Meas MER A Low
[ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer B
Meas MER B Low
[ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer C
Meas MER C Low
[ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer A
Meas Pre Vit A BER
[ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer B
Meas Pre Vit B BER
[ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer C
Meas Pre Vit C BER
[ISDB-T] FE Not Locked
FE Not Locked
[ISDB-T] FE Squelch
FE Squelch
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 124 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Description-Alarm
[ISDB-T] FE CN Low
FE C/N Low
[ISDB-T] FE MER Layer A
FE MER A Low
[ISDB-T] FE MER Layer B
FE MER B Low
[ISDB-T] FE MER Layer C
FE MER C Low
[ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer A
FE Pre Vit A BER
[ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer B
FE Pre Vit B BER
[ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer C
FE Pre Vit C BER
[ISDB-T] FE Emergency Flag
FE emergency flag
[ATSC] No Input
Input not valid
[ATSC] Input Overflow
Input overflow
[ATSC] MH Err
MH Error
[ATSC] MEAS Demodulator Not Locked
Meas Not Locked
[ATSC] MEAS SNR Low
Meas SNR Low
[ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked
FE Not Locked
[ATSC] FE SNR Low
FE SNR Low
[ATSC] No TVCT
TVCT Not Present
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 125 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.14.1 Date and Time Setting
The upper part of the event window shows the actual time and date and allows the manual setting of
those parameters.
Figure 43.
Time and date setting
Click to each part of the date and time to change the parameter and then increase or decrease its value
with the up/down arrows.
Note: When the onboard GPS receiver is locked and GPS frequency reference is enabled, the date and
time information are received by GPS satellite and updated every thirty seconds.
The board incorporates a rechargeable battery to maintain the time when there isn’t a power supply.
The battery supplies the clock for two or three days, after that the time shall be reset either by char
interface, or LCD display, or Java interface or selecting the GPS as frequency reference.
5.14.2 Task Error Event
The watchdog performs a periodic (every 20 seconds) polling of tasks and triggers a system reset if one
or more tasks do not answer, restarting the Code loader (See Codeloader_Operations_Note_v1.1.doc for
further information) and generating a TSK ERR event as follows:
TSK ERR 00000028, 0000003c
The blue underlined 32-bits word is the enabling status of the alarms mask. The red underlined 32-bits
word indicates the status of tasks (1 if the task has been successfully performed, otherwise 0) as
specified in the following table:
Table 25.
TASK
Task error event specific data
Description
Bit
WD_FAN_TASK
This task controls fans speed on the basis of the board
temperature.
WD_UPCV_TASK
This task controls the Up-converter status.
WD_GPS_TASK
This task controls the GPS status.
This task gathers quite all the board information in order to
perform the following operations:
It updates all variables of the system;
WD_STATUS_TASK
It manages alarms;
It manages the RF status (e.g. on, off…);
It manages the mode switch;
It manages the ARP resolution in DVB mode.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 126 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
TASK
Description
Bit
WD_TCP_IP_TASK
This task implements the TCP-IP protocol stack.
WD_TIMER_TICK_TASK
This task generates the clock for the TCP-IP task.
WD_STV0362_TASK
This task gathers information from both the HP and LP tuners
and configures them.
This task gathers information from:
Get ADC value
Get Amplifier Voltage and current measure
Calculate FWD power level
WD_ARK6AL_TASK
Output AGC
Calculate Reflex power
Get temperature
Get opto & relay status
Disable alim status
The default tasks mask at the board startup is set to 0x0000007D (please note that the up-converter task
is initially skipped). Once the presence of the up-converter is assured, the up-converter task bit is
automatically enabled and the mask is set to 0x0000007F. Tasks execution is stopped during defragmentation operations and FPGA boots.
5.14.3 System Error Event
For critical and fatal errors, the system calls the system error function and the SYS_ERR event is
reported.
The error codes are described below:
0x00: Out of memory. Memory pool size is too small.
0x01: Invalid memory block release. Buffer data has been written out of boundaries of the
allocated memory block.
0x02: Link pointer corrupted. Buffer data has been written out of boundaries of the allocated
memory block.
0x03: No free UDP Sockets. The system has run out of UDP Sockets.
0x04: No free TCP Sockets. The system has run out of TCP Sockets.
0x05: TCP socket is in an undefined state. System memory has been accidentally overwritten.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 127 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.14.4 System Initialization Event
At every system initialization the event System Init is generated.
This event is followed by 25 bytes specifying type and specific code of errors occurred during system
initialization.
Each byte refers to an error as described in the following table:
Table 26.
Init system event specific data
Description
FS_ERR
File System error.
INFO_ERR
*.cfg file error.
DEF_ERR
*.def file error.
LCD_ERR
LCD error.
PLL_960M_ERR
960 MHz PLL error.
BOOT_ERR
FPGA boot error.
LOAD_CFG_ERR
*.sav file error.
SNMP_ERR
SNMP file error.
Version 1.1
Errors code
0x00: File System ok.
0x01: FS partition error (invalid FS).
0x00: File ok.
0x01: File not found or File open error.
0x02…0x03: Invalid file (syntax errors).
0x00: File ok.
0x01: File open error.
0x02: File not found.
0x00: LCD ok.
0x01: LCD not found.
0x00: PLL locked.
0x01: PLL not locked
0x00: FPGA boot ok.
0x01: FPGA NILL boot error
0x02: FPGA file version error
0x03: FPGA code error.
0x00: File ok.
0x01: File open error.
0x02…0x05: Invalid file (syntax errors).
0x00: SNMP file ok.
0x01: SNMP file not found.
0x02: File open error.
0x03: UDP socket initialization error.
0x04: Port 161 open error.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Byte
1°
2°
3°
4°
5°
6°
7°
8°
Page 128 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Description
CALIB_ERR
*.pwr file error.
Errors code
0x00: File ok.
0x01: Current AGC mode file not found.
0x02: Current AGC mode file open error.
0x03…0x12: Invalid current AGC mode file (syntax error).
0x20: Other AGC mode file not found
0x21: Other AGC mode file open error.
0x22…0x26: Invalid other AGC mode file (syntax error).
Byte
9°
Please note that the AGC mode may be analog or digital.
Actual AGC mode is displayed in Java output window.
PREC_ERR
LINEAR_ERR
DOWNCV_ERR
Downconverter PLL not
locked error.
UPCV_ERR
Upconverter error.
CH_FILT_ERR
*.chf7 or *.chf8 file error.
0x00: File ok.
0x00: File ok.
0x01: File not found.
0x02: File open error.
0x03…0x06: Invalid file (syntax errors).
0x00: PLL locked.
0x01: PLL not locked
0x10: PLL disabled.
0x00: Upconverter ready.
0x00: File ok.
0x01: File not found.
0x02: File open error.
0x03…0x06: Invalid file (syntax errors).
10°
11°
12°
13°
14°
Please note that checked file is the one which refers to the
current signal bandwidth: *.chf7 refers to VHF bandwidth, *.chf8
refers to UHF bandwidth.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 129 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Description
CH_DEF_ERR
*.cdef file error.
Version 1.1
Errors code
0x00: File ok.
0x01: File not found.
0x02: File open error.
0x03: syntax error or lack of input number of channels.
0x13: syntax error or lack of output number of channels.
0x04: input channels memory allocation error.
0x14: output channels memory allocation error.
0x05: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in
*.cdef file is disabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of input
channels definition lines.
0x15: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in
*.cdef file is disabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of
output channels definition lines.
0x06: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in
*.cdef file is enabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of input
channels definition lines.
0x16: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in
*.cdef file is enabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of
output channels definition lines.
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Byte
15°
Page 130 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.15 System menu
Figure 44.
Menu bar
The menu bar allows the access to three menus:
File: allows to import/export the configuration file, to load and save the board configuration
and to download the screenshots of the Java GUI;
View: allows to navigate windows and to configure java update time and events alert massages;
Help: allows to access information such as board name, board IP address, serial numbers of HW
components, File System content, an abstract of the User Manual and system characteristics.
5.15.1 File Menu
Figure 45.
File menu
The File menu is structured as follows:
Save: saves the current device configuration.
Load: loads the last saved configuration.
Export Config: exports last saved configuration of the device (the *.sav file).
Import Config: imports a new configuration file (the *.sav file).
Capture screenshots: downloads a screenshot for each one of the selected windows.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 131 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.15.2 View Menu
Figure 46.
View menu
The View menu allows accessing the following windows:
Home Page
Input
Front-End
ISDB-T Processing
ITU Processing
DVB-T Processing
ATSC Processing
DVB-T2 Processing
Linear Precorrection
AM/PM Precorrection
Adaptive Linear Precorrection
Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection
Output
Network.
GPS.
Alarms
Events: Events window.
Options...: Options window.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 132 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.15.2.1 Options window
The Options window has two tabs:
Time: Time Read Interval [s];
Alerts: the selection of events to display.
Click on the Save button to save Java options; a new *.properties file will be created.
The device is not loaded with a factory default *.properties file, but it is created and then stored in
System File once properties are saved for the first time.
5.15.2.1.1
Time
Figure 47.
Time window
This control allows changing the device-to-management PC java update time. The default value is 2
seconds. Click on Close button to quit this window.
5.15.2.1.2
Alerts
Figure 48.
Alerts window
Alerts tab allows selecting which types of events will be notified through Alert boxes. Alerts appear on
the right side of the monitor.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 133 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
The selection is performed among the following types of event:
Commands (blue boxes):
Gigabit Ethernet commands;
RS232 commands;
SNMP commands;
LCD Display commands.
Alarms (red boxes);
Events (green messages):
Board events.
Typing error (yellow messages):
Typed setting is incorrect.
Click on hide button to close alerts popup windows.
Figure 49.
Alert message
Alerts can be disabled through the hide button located on the right side of the box.
The hide button, once clicked, disables all boxes belonging to the same class.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 134 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.15.3 Help Menu
Figure 50.
Help menu
The Help menu allows to select one of the following options:
Contents: Help with an abstract of the User Manual.
About: shows the board name and the management IP address. It also provides uC, FPGA, Java
and GPS software versions. Click on OK button to close the window.
Figure 51.
Version 1.1
About window
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 135 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Info: shows serial numbers of HW components, File System content and the managed system
characteristics. Click on OK button to close Info window.
Figure 52.
Figure 53.
Figure 54.
Version 1.1
Info window: Serial Numbers
Info window: Server File System Content
Info window: Client System Parameters
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 136 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.16 Download Software Standalone
The Download Software Standalone button allows the downloading of standalone Java application
(executable *.jar file) based on java applet.
If your browser is Internet Explorer, it may block the site from downloading files to your computer. If you
want to enable the file downloading, follow the instructions listed below:
Open Internet Explorer;
Click on the Tools button and then click on Internet Options;
Click on the Security tab and then click on Custom level button;
To turn off the Information bar for file downloads, scroll to the Downloads section of the list, and
then, under Automatic prompting for file downloads, click on Enable;
Click on OK, click Yes in order to confirm that you want to make the change, and then click OK
again.
Figure 55.
Version 1.1
Download Software Standalone
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 137 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
6 Local User Interface
The following paragraphs describe the local user interface for ARK6 T2. This user interface is composed
of LCD Display, seven buttons and two status LEDs. Here below is depicted the ARK6 Front Panel.
ESCAPE
ON
ALARM
STANB-BY
OK
LEFT ARROW
RIGHT ARROW
UP ARROW
DOWN ARROW
STAND-BY: push this button (lie in wait for two seconds) to put the equipment on STAND-BY
mode. The orange led lights up and the written STAND-BY MODE appears on the display. The
remote Stand-by mode is enforceable only if on JAVA interface this feature is enabled.
ON: push this button (lie in wait for two seconds) to turn on the equipment. The green led lights
up and the MAIN MENU is displayed.
OK: push this button to select or to confirm the sub-menu or the value respectively. Touching
the screen with a finger the green led lights up.
ESC: push this button to quit a submenu and to return to the previous one. Touching the screen
with a finger the green led lights up.
ALARM: when an alarm occurs the RED LED lights up.
UP ARROW: push this button to scroll up menus or to increase a value. Touching the screen
with a finger the green led lights up.
DOWN ARROW: push this button to scroll down menus or to decrease a value. Touching the
screen with a finger the green led lights up.
LEFT ARROW: push this button to move within a string. Touching the screen with a finger the
green led lights up.
RIGHT ARROW: push this button to move within a string. Touching the screen with a finger the
green led lights up.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 138 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
6.1 Boot and Welcome Message
Turning on the equipment, the display shows the progress bar as follow:
Screen Service
ARK - DVB-T2
System Init
Init : [
Screen Service
ARK - DVB-T2
Start system
Init : [
Wait
Screen Service
ARK - DVB-T2
Boot FPGA
Init : [
Wait
Wait
Screen Service
ARK - DVB-T2
Start system
Init : [
Ready
When the boot is over, the device is ready.
Screen Service
ARK - DVB-T2
Start system
Init : [
Screen Service
ARK - DVB-T2
IP 10.77.98.44
Ready
Ready
Press ESC to enter the main menu, otherwise after one minute waiting the idle status message appears.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 139 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
6.2 Idle Menu
ARK - DVB-T2
In:ASI1
Out 17.1dBm
CH:22
UTC: 14:11
10/03/11
This menu appears after one minute waiting from the last touch. Information contained in the Idle Menu
are described in next table.
Table 27.
Local User Interface: Idle Menu
Information
Description
ARK – DVB-T2 (ATSC)
Device description
In
Input signal source
Out
Output power and channel
IP
Management IP address (GBE 1)
UTC
UTC time and date
Press ESC to enter the MAIN MENU.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 140 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
6.3 Main Menu
Events
Network setup
Time & Date setup
/ /
OK: SET
This menu shows six SUBMENUs. It is possible to view them sliding the menu up and down, with the UP
or DOWN ARROWS, and to select one of them by pushing OK button.
Submenus contained in the Main Menu are described in next table.
Table 28.
Local User Interface: submenus descriptions
Submenu
Description
Enter this submenu to set:
Network setup
GbE1 Board IP address
GbE1 Gateway address
GbE1 Netmask
GbE2 IP address
GbE2 Gateway address
GbE2 Netmask
Settings in this submenu do not need to be saved; they will be loaded
at next device restart.
Enter this submenu to set:
Time & Date setup
Time
Date
Settings in this submenu do not need to be saved in order to be
loaded at next device restart.
System Status
Enter this submenu to monitor system status and installer version the
device is loaded with.
Alarms
Alarms, detected and associated to the local interface by the relative
mask, are listed in this submenu.
Reset system
Enter this submenu to reset the device.
Events
Enter this submenu to manage and monitor the events list.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 141 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
6.4 LCD Alarms
Through the LCD Alarms mask it is possible to select which alarm has to be notified on LCD display. When
an alarm condition occurs the alarm button is lighted and an alarm message is displayed in the Alarms
submenu.
The following table lists alarms to alarm messages association (refer to Alarms paragraph for further
information about alarms and their masks).
Table 29.
Alarms descriptions list
Alarm
Alarm Message
Temperature Absolute High
Temp. High
Temperature Alarm (-3dB)
Temp. High (-3dB)
Temperature Warning
Temp.High Warning
Fans Speed Low
Fans Speed Low
Alim Dialog Err
Alim Dialog Err
FE Dialog Err
FE Dialog Err
Meas Dialog Err
Meas Dialog Err
GPS Dialog Err
GPS Dialog Err
GPS Not Locked
GPS Not Locked
120MHz Not Locked
120M Not Locked
960MHz Not Locked
960M Not Locked
Input PLL Not Locked
In PLL Not Locked
Output PLL Not Locked
Out PLL Not Locked
10MHz Not Locked
10M Not Locked
1PPS Not Locked
1PPS Not Locked
FPGA Boot Error
FPGA Boot Err
Forward Power High
FWD Power High
Forward Power Low Warning
FWD Low Warning
Forward Power Low Alarm
FWD Pwr Low
Reflex Power High
Reflex Power High
File System Error
FS Err
Bad File In File System
File Error
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 142 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Alarm
Alarm Message
PS Voltage Out Of Range
PS1V Out Of Range
PS Current Out Of Range
PS1I Out Of Range
CPU Fan Error
CPU Fan Error
Test Mode
Test Mode
FE S2 Not Locked
FE S2 not locked
FE S2 S/N Low
FE S2 SNR Low
FE S2 BER High
FE S2 BER high
FE S2 Global Alarm
[ATSC] No Input
Input not valid
[ATSC] Input Overflow
Input overflow
[ATSC] MH Err
MH Error
[ATSC] MEAS Demodulator Not Locked
Meas Not Locked
[ATSC] MEAS SNR Low
Meas SNR Low
[ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked
FE Not Locked
[ATSC] FE SNR Low
FE SNR Low
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 143 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7 SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol
The SNMP model assumes the existence of managers and agents. A manager is a software module in a
management system responsible for managing the device. An agent is a software module in a managed
device responsible for maintaining local management information and delivering that information to a
manager via SNMP. A management information exchange can be initiated by the manager (via polling)
or by the agent (via trap).
Interaction between a user of board management and the board management software takes place
across a user interface. Such an interface is needed to provide users with a monitoring and controlling
tool in order to allow some parameters to be viewed or set locally.
The operations that are supported in SNMP network management are the alteration and inspection of
variables. Specifically, three general-purpose operations may be performed on scalar objects:
Get: a management station retrieves a scalar object value from a managed station.
Set: a management station updates a scalar object value in a managed station.
Trap: a managed station sends an unsolicited scalar object value to a management station.
Management information accessible via SNMP is maintained in a management information base (MIB) at
each manager and agent node.
On manager side, ARK6 management system has been tested with MG-SOFT as MIB Browser; besides
compatibility with any other MIB browser is assured.
The following MIB libraries are required for the SNMP management of the equipment:
screenservice.mib
network.mib
ark6-atsc.mib2
screen-common-types.mib
output.mib
ark6-isdbt.mib2
ark6-t2.mib
screen-common.mib
ark6-itu.mib2
clk-ref.mib
t2-fe.mib
ark6-t.mib2
clock.mib
t2-meas.mib
atsc-fe.mib2
gps.mib
t2-modulation.mib
atsc-meas.mib2
hw-monitor.mib
ts-over-ip.mib
atsc-modulation.mib2
input.mib
itu-modulation.mib2
isdbt-fe.mib2
measure.mib
t-fe.mib2
isdbt-meas.mib2
s2-fe.mib2
t-meas.mib2
isdbt-modulation.mib2
ark6.mib
t-modulation.mib2
Compatibility tested and assured with SNMP version 1 and 2.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 144 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.1 SNMP Protocol Preferences
Go to SNMP Protocol Preferences. The following parameters should be set in order to correctly configure
the SNMP Manager:
SNMP protocol version: SNMPv1/SNMPv2;
Read Community: the same of the one set in the Get field of Java interface, community section;
Set Community: the same of the one set in the Set field of Java interface, community section;
Timeout [s]: user defined;
Retransmits: user defined;
Port number: 161.
Next figure illustrates how to configure SNMP Protocol Preferences using MG_SOFT MIB Browser as an
example.
Figure 56.
Version 1.1
SNMP Protocol Preferences
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 145 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.2 Monitoring
All status and setup information can be queried via SNMP. To get the setup and status information you
need a management system (or a special MIB browser).
Next figure, referring to MG-SOFT MIB Browser as an example, is a broad view of the ARK6 tree
structure.
Figure 57.
Version 1.1
ARK6 Tree Structure
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 146 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
The SSBT MIBs are:
ssbt-common-types: the MIB module housing SSBT Textual Conventions.
ssbtAtscModulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated
in ATSC mode.
ssbtClock: the MIB module for clock management.
ssbtArk6Atsc: the specific ARK6-ATSC MIB.
ssbtGps: the MIB module to monitor the collection of live data from the GPS receiver.
ssbtHwMonitor: The MIB module for HW monitor.
ssbtInput: the MIB module to monitor and manage inputs.
ssbtIsdbtModulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated
in ISDB-T mode.
ssbtItuModulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated in
ITU mode.
ssbtOutput: the MIB module to monitor and manage outputs.
ssbtTsOverIP: the MIB module to manage input and output GbE channels.
ssbtT2Modulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated in
DVB-T2 mode.
ssbtArk6T2: the specific ARK6-T2 MIB.
ssbtMeasure: the MIB module to manage and monitor ARK6 Measure board.
ssbtCommon: the MIB module housing SSBT common objects.
ssbtClkRef: the MIB module to set the frequency reference.
ssbtT2FrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from DVB-T2 Front-End.
ssbtT2Meas: the MIB module to manage and monitor T2 information from Measure board.
ssbtNetwork: the MIB module for network monitoring.
ssbtArk6T: the specific ARK6-T MIB.
ssbtTFrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from DVB-T Front-End.
ssbtTMeas: the MIB module to manage and monitor DVB-T information from Measure board.
ssbtTModulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated in
DVB-T mode.
ssbtArk6: the MIB module for the objects common to all ARK6 modes.
ssbtS2FrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from DVB-S/S2 Front-End.
ssbtArk6Isdbt: the specific ARK6-ISDBT MIB.
ssbtIsdbtFrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from ISDB-T Front-End.
ssbtIsdbtMeas: the MIB module to manage and monitor ISDB-T information from Measure
board.
ssbtAtscMeas: the MIB module to manage and monitor ATSC information from Measure board.
ssbtArk6Itu: the specific ARK6-ITU MIB.
ssbtAtscFrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from ATSC Front-End.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 147 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 30.
OID
ARK6 SNMP Tree Structure
Name
R/W
1.3
1.3.6
1.3.6.1
1.3.6.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1
1.3.6.1.2.1.1
iso
org
dod
internet
mgmt
mib-2
system
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1
sysDescr
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7
1.3.6.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.3
sysObjectID
sysUpTimeInstance
sysContact
sysName
sysLocation
sysServices
private
enterprise
ssbt
ssbtAtscModulation
amMobileHandheld
ammhPid
ammhEnable
ammhFrameStatus
ssbtClock
reference
refClock
gps
satellites
satVisible
satTracked
position
positionLatitude
positionLongitude
utc
Version 1.1
Description
A textual description of the entity. This value includes the
full name and version identification of the system"
Identification name of the equipment managed
RW
RW
ATSC M/H mode PID setting
Enables ATSC M/H mode
ATSC M/H frame alarm
RW
Frequency reference selector
Number of visible satellites.
Number of locked satellite.
Latitude position [°]
Longitude position [°]
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 148 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.4
utcDate
gpsLockStatus
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.4.1
glsGps
GPS lock status derived from live data provided by the
GPS receiver
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.3
ocxo
fineFreqAdjust
dataToFlash
ocxoLockStatus
olsGps
ols10Mhz
ols1Pps
holdover
hEnable
hTimeout
hStatus
RW
Enables the Holdover mechanism
Sets the timeout of the Holdover in hour
OCXO locked to the external GPS reference
OCXO locked to the external 10 MHz reference
OCXO locked to the external 1PPS reference
RW
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.4
hTmoStatus
Enables the Holdover mechanism
Sets the timeout of the Holdover in hour
The status of the Holdover mechanism
The countdown of the Holdover timeout expressed in
seconds
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.1
ssbtHwMonitor
reflexPower
amplifierStatus
powerSupplies
psNumber
psTable
psEntry
psIndex
psDescr
psVMeasUnit
psVoltage
psCMeasUnit
psCurrent
psRestart
fans
fansNumber
fansTable
fansEntry
fansIndex
Version 1.1
Name
R/W
Description
UTC date and time as specified in SNMPv2-TC
Reflex power [dBm x 10]
Amplifier status
NA
The number of power supplies present on this system
NA
Power supply description
Voltage unit of measurement
Voltage indicator
Current unit of measurement
Current indicator
Restarts the amplifier
The number of fans present on this system
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 149 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6
fansDescr
fansMeasUnit
fansSpeed
temperatures
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.1
tempNumber
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.9.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.9.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1.2
tempTable
tempEntry
tempIndex
tempDescr
tempMeasUnit
tempLevel
relays
rlNumber
rlTable
rlEntry
rlIndex
rlDescr
rlStatus
optocouplers
optNumber
optTable
optEntry
optIndex
optDescr
optStatus
cpuFan
cfNoFan
cfFanFault
ssbtInput
inputSettings
isT2InputManagement
ist2imInputSel
ist2imRfChannel
NA
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1.3
ist2imRfFreqOff
RW
Version 1.1
Name
R/W
NA
NA
Description
Fan description
Fan speed unit of measurement
Fan speed
The number of temperature sensors present on this
system
Temperature indicator description
Temperature unit of measurement
Temperature indicator
The number of relays present on this system
Relay description
Relay status
The number of optocouplers present on this system
Optocoupler description
Optocoupler status
CPU Fan missing alarm status
CPU ventilation blocked alarm status
RW
RW
Input selector
Input channel selector
Input frequency offset expressed in Hz (1Hz steps, from 200 kHz to 200 kHz)
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 150 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.3
Name
isT2InputAutoswitch
ist2iaEnable
ist2iaState
ist2iaActualInput
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.4
ist2iaPrimaryToSecondaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.5
ist2iaSecondaryToSecondaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.6
ist2iaSecondaryToPrimaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3
isTInputManagement
istimInputSel
istimisHpInput1
istimisLpInput1
istimisHpInput2
istimisLpInput2
istimRfChannel
istimRfFreqOff
isTSeamlessSwitch
istssHpInput
istsshiForceInput
istsshiPriorityInput
istsshiUsedInput
istsshiSwitchState
istssLpInput
istsslpForceInput
istsslpPriorityInput
istsslpUsedInput
istsslpSwitchState
istssSeamlessAlarms
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.2
Version 1.1
R/W
Description
Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine
Current state of the finite-state machine
Shows the currently used input
Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed
in seconds
Secondary to secondary input switch countdown
expressed in seconds
Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed
in seconds
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
High Priority input 1 selector
Low Priority input 1 selector
High Priority input 2 selector
Low Priority input 2 selector
Input channel selector
Input frequency offset +/- 200 kHz (1Hz step)
RW
RW
Forces the use of the selected input as High Priority input
Sets the priority input
Shows the currently used input
Shows the status of the Seamless Switch
RW
RW
Forces the use of the selected input as Low Priority input
Sets the priority input
Shows the currently used input
Shows the status of the Seamless Switch
istsssaInputNumber
The number of inputs depending on the Hierarchical
Mode and on the HP/LP Force Input selectors
istsssaTable
istsssaEntry
istsssaIndex
istsssaInputDescr
NA
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Input description
Page 151 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
Name
R/W
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.3
istsssaPatCrcEn
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.4
istsssaMipCrcEn
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.5
istsssaSyncErrEn
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.6
istsssaPktJitterEn
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.7
istsssaTransportErrEn
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.8
istsssaAsiWordErrEn
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.9
istsssaMipPriorityErrEn
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5.2
istsssaNetworkDelay
istsssaWatchdogErr
istsssaLateMipErr
istsssaNotValidErr
istsssaPatCrcErr
istsssaMipCrcErr
istsssaSyncErr
istsssaPktJitterErr
istsssaTransportErr
istsssaAsiWordErr
istsssaNetworkDelayErr
istsssaMipPriorityErr
isIInputManagement
isiimInputSel
isiimRfChannel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5.3
isiimRfFreqOff
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.2
isAInputManagement
isaimInputSel
isaimRfChannel
isaimRfFreqOff
isAInputAutoswitch
isaiaEnable
isaiaState
Version 1.1
RW
RW
Description
Enables the PAT CRC alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm
Mask
Enables the MIP CRC alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm
Mask
Enables the Sync alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask
Enables the Packet Jitter alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm
Mask
Enables the Transport Error alarm bit in the Seamless
Alarm Mask
Enables the ASI Word Error alarm bit in the Seamless
Alarm Mask
Enables the MIP Priority alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm
Mask
Shows the Network Delay of the specific entry
Input Watchdog alarm status
Late MIP alarm status
Invalid Input alarm status
PAT CRC alarm status
MIP CRC alarm status
Transport Stream Sync Error alarm status
Packet Jitter alarm status
Transport Error alarm status
ASI Word Error alarm status
Network Delay alarm status
MIP Priority alarm status
Input selector
Input channel selector
Input frequency offset expressed in Hz (1Hz steps, from 200 kHz to 200 kHz)
RW
RW
RW
Input selector
Input channel selector
Input frequency offset +/- 200 kHz (1Hz step)
RW
Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine
Current state of the finite-state machine
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 152 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.3
isaiaActualInput
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.4
isaiaPrimaryToSecondaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.5
isaiaSecondaryToSecondaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.6
isaiaSecondaryToPrimaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.8.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.8.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.3
isItuInputManagement
isituimInputSel
isituimSdiAudioSel
isItuInputAutoswitch
isituiaEnable
isituiaState
isituiaActualInput
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.4
isituiaPrimaryToSecondaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.5
isituiaSecondaryToSecondaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.6
isituiaSecondaryToPrimaryCounter
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3
inputStatistics
isNumber
isTable
isEntry
isIndex
isDescr
isType
isWordRate
isBitRate
isFiltered
isOverflow
isLock
isPckFormat
isCarrierDetect
isErrors
isBypassEnable
sdi
Version 1.1
Name
R/W
Description
Shows the currently used input
Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed
in seconds
Secondary to secondary input switch countdown
expressed in seconds
Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed
in seconds
RW
RW
Input selector
SDI audio selector
RW
Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine
Current state of the finite-state machine
Shows the currently used input
Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed
in seconds
Secondary to secondary input switch countdown
expressed in seconds
Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed
in seconds
NA
RW
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Number of inputs
Input descriptor
Input type
Input word rate
Iinput bitrate
Filtered bitrate
Overflow
Lock status
Packet format
Carrier detect indicator
Wrong bytes received
Cable equalizer bypass enable
Page 153 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.5
Name
sdiNumber
sdiTable
sdiEntry
sdiIndex
sdiDescr
sdiLock
sdiCarrierDetectAlarm
sdiCh12Present
R/W
NA
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.6
sdiCh1Level
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.7
sdiCh2Level
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.8
sdiCh34Present
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.9
sdiCh3Level
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.10
sdiCh4Level
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1
sdiStandard
sdiBypassEnable
cvbs
cvbsNumber
cvbsTable
cvbsEntry
cvbsIndex
cvbsDescr
cvbsLock
cvbsColorSub
cvbsVerticalLock
cvbsHorizontalLock
cvbsStandard
cvbsFrameRate
cvbsADPalCompensation
t2FrontEnd
t2feStatistics
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.1
t2fesRxLevel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.2
t2fesCarrierOffset
Version 1.1
Description
Number of SDI inputs.
Index of the specific entry
SDI input description
SDI lock status
SDI carrier detect alarm
SDI audio channels 1-2 are present
SDI audio channel 1 level expressed in dBFS (-128
stands for muted or no signal)
SDI audio channel 2 level expressed in dBFS (-128
stands for muted or no signal)
SDI audio channels 3-4 are present
SDI audio channel 3 level expressed in dBFS (-128
stands for muted or no signal)
SDI audio channel 4 level expressed in dBFS (-128
stands for muted or no signal)
SDI standard
Cable equalizer bypass enable
NA
Number of CVBS inputs.
RW
Index of the specific entry
Input description
Input lock status
Color subcarrier lock status
Vertical lock status
Horizontal lock status
CVBS input standard
Frame rate
Enables the A/D PAL Compensation
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Input RX level 127: over input -128: low power 63...62: power expressed in dB
Input carrier offset
Page 154 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.22
Version 1.1
Name
t2fesIfAgc
t2fesRfAgc
t2fesTsLock
t2fesSyncStat
t2fesMer
t2fesSnr
t2fesPreLdpcBer
t2fesPostBchFer
t2fesPreBchBer
t2fesDemodPpm
t2fesSignalQuality
t2fesBitrate
t2fesLdpcIter
t2feL1Pre
t2feL1PreType
t2feL1PreBwt
t2feL1PreS1
t2feL1PreS2
t2feL1PreFftSize
t2feL1PreMixed
t2feL1PreL1Repeat
t2feL1PreGuardInterval
t2feL1PrePapr
t2feL1PreL1Mod
t2feL1PreL1CodeRate
t2feL1PreL1Fec
t2feL1PreL1PostSize
t2feL1PreL1PostInfoSize
t2feL1PrePilotPattern
t2feL1PreTxIdAvailability
t2feL1PreCellId
t2feL1PreT2NetworkId
t2feL1PreT2SystemId
t2feL1PreNumT2Frames
t2feL1PreNumDataSymb
t2feL1PreRegenFlag
R/W
Description
Input IF AGC level
Input RF AGC level
Demodulated TS Lock
Sync statistics
Input MER [dBx1e3]
Input SNR [dBx1e3]
Input Pre LDPC BER [1e7]
Input Post BCH FER [1e6]
Input Pre BCH BER [1e9]
Demodulated PPM [ppmx1e2]
Signal quality [%]
Expected bitrate
LDPC iterations per minute
Input stream type
BWT extension indicator
S1 field
S2 field
FFT size
Mixed indicator
L1 repeat enable flag
Guard Interval
PAPR
L1 modulation scheme
L1 code rate
L1 FEC Type
L1 Post Size
L1 Post Info Size
Pilot Pattern
TX Id
Cell Id
T2 Network Id
T2 System Id
Number of T2 frames
Number of data symbols
Regeneration count indicator
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 155 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.23
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.24
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.11
Version 1.1
Name
t2feL1PreL1PostExt
t2feL1PreRfIndex
t2feL1Post
t2feL1PostSubSliceNum
t2feL1PostFefType
t2feL1PostFefLength
t2feL1PostFefInterval
t2feL1PostAux
t2feL1PostAuxNum
t2feL1PostAuxTable
t2feL1PostAuxEntry
t2feL1PostAuxIndex
t2feL1PostAuxStreamType
t2feL1PostAuxPrivateConf
t2feL1PostRf
t2feL1PostNumRf
t2feL1PostRfTable
t2feL1PostRfEntry
t2feL1PostRfIndex
t2feL1PostRfIdx
t2feL1PostFrequency
t2feL1PostPlp
t2feL1PostPlpNum
t2feL1PostPlpTable
t2feL1PostPlpEntry
t2feL1PostPlpIndex
t2feL1PostPlpId
t2feL1PostPlpType
t2feL1PostPlpPayloadType
t2feL1PostFfFlag
t2feL1PostFirstRfIdx
t2feL1PostFirstFrameIdx
t2feL1PostGroupId
t2feL1PostPlpCod
t2feL1PostPlpMod
t2feL1PostPlpRotation
R/W
Description
L1 Post extension enabled
The current RF index
Number of sub-slices per frame
The type of the associated FEF part
FEF length
FEF interval
NA
Number of AUXs
NA
NA
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
The type of the current auxiliary stream
RFU
The number of RF frequencies in use
RF index
Frequency
Number of PLPs
PLP ID
PLP type
PLP payload type
FF flag
First RF index
First frame index
PLP group id
The code rate used by the associated PLP
The modulation used by the associated PLP
DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator
Page 156 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1
Name
t2feL1PostPlpFec
t2feL1PostNumBlocksMax
t2feL1PostFrameInterval
t2feL1PostTimeIntLength
t2feL1PostTimeIntType
t2feL1PostInbandA
t2feL1PostInbandB
t2feL1PostPlpMode
t2feL1PostStaticFlag
t2feL1PostStaticPaddFlag
tFrontEnd
tfeStatistics
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.1
tfesRxLevel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.10
tfesCarrierOffset
tfesIfAgc
tfesRfAgc
tfesTsLock
tfesSyncStat
tfesMer
tfesSnr
tfesPreVitBer
tfesPreRsBer
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.11
tfesRsErrCount
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.7
tfesDemodPpm
tfesSignalQuality
tfesBitrate
tfeDemodParams
tfedpConstellation
tfedpHierMode
tfedpHpCodeRate
tfedpLpCodeRate
tfedpFft
tfedpGuardInterval
tfedpCelllId
Input RX level 127: over input -128: low power 63...62: power expressed in dB
Input carrier offset
Input IF AGC level
Input RF AGC level
Demodulated TS Lock
Sync statistics
Input MER [dBx1e3]
Input SNR [dBx1e3]
Input Pre Viterbi BER [1e7]
Input Pre RS BER [1e7]
Input RS errors count detected by the RS decoder over 1
second
Demodulated PPM [ppmx1e2]
Signal quality [%]
Expected bitrate
Constellation for current modulation scheme
Hierarchy information for current modulation scheme
High Priority Code Rate
Low Priority Code Rate
FFT size
Guard interval
Cell identifier
Version 1.1
R/W
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Description
The FEC type used by the associated PLP
Maximum number of PLP blocks
Frame interval
Time interleaving length
Time interleaving type
In-band A flag
In-band B flag
PLP mode
Static flag
Static padding flag
Page 157 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1
Name
s2FrontEnd
s2feSettngs
s2feFrequency
s2feSymbolRate
s2fePolarization
s2feIsiA
s2feIsiB
s2fePls
s2fepMode
s2fepN0
s2fepN1
s2fepN2
s2feDemodParams
s2fedpRxLevel
s2fedpLock
s2fedpStandard
s2fedpRxModCode
s2fedpBand
s2fedpMode
s2fedpSnr
s2fedpPilots
s2fedpRollOff
s2fedpConstellation
s2fedpBer
isdbtFrontEnd
ifeStatistics
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.1
ifesRxLevel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.9
ifesIfLevel
ifesIfAgcDac
ifesDemState
ifesMode
ifesGuardInterval
ifesSTRFreqErr
ifesCRFreqErr
ifesCN
Version 1.1
R/W
Description
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Frequency [MHz]
Symbol Rate [KBaud]
Polarization
Input Stream Identifier A
Input Stream Identifier B
RW
RW
RW
RW
Mode selector
PLS number 0 setting
PLS number 1 setting
PLS number 2 setting
Input RX level [dBm]
Transponder lock status
Input standard
Modulation mode
Band
Mode
S/N level [dB * 10]
Pilots
Roll off
Constellation
Bit Error Rate (* 10^7)
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Input RX level 127: over input -128: low power 63...62: power expressed in dB
Input IF level
IF AGC output DAC value
The state of the sequencer
Input mode
Input guard interval
Frequency error detected by symbol timing recovery [Hz]
Frequency error detected by carrier recovery [kHz]
Estimated Carrier to Noise ratio (dB x 10)
Page 158 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.5
Version 1.1
Name
ifeLayerStatistics
ifelsNumber
ifelsTable
ifelsEntry
ifelsIndex
ifelsDescr
ifelsMod
ifelsCodeRate
ifelsTILength
ifelsSegNum
ifelsMer
ifelsPreVitBer
ifelsPostVitBer
ifelsPktErrRate
atscFrontEnd
afeStatistics
afesFrequencyOffset
afesDemodStatus
afesEqStatus
afesDemLock
afesAgcLock
afesFrameLock
afesCarrierFreqLoopLock
afesTimingFreqLoopLock
afesSnr
afesSer
afesBer
ssbtIsdbtModulation
imSettings
imsIipStatus
imsisValid
imsisAlarm
imsNetworkMode
imsEquipmentId
imsDefIip
imsNetworkDelay
R/W
NA
Description
The number of Layers
Layer description
Modulation scheme
Code rate
Time Interleaving length
Number of segments
MER [dB] (* 10)
Pre-Viterbi BER (* 10^9)
Post-Viterbi BER (* 10^9)
Packet Error Rate (* 10^9)
Input carrier offset
VSB demodulation status
Equalizer status
Demodulator lock status
Digital AGC lock status
Frame lock status
Carrier frequency loop lock status
Timing frequency loop lock status
Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
Segment Error Rate
Bit Error Rate
RW
RW
Input IIP valid
Input IIP alarm
Transmitter network mode selector
Equipment ID
Equipment ID found in IIP
Network delay [100ns]
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 159 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.6
imsEWS
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.6.1
imsewsEnable
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.4
imsewsSetting
imsLayersMonitor
imslmNumber
imslmTable
imslmEntry
imslmIndex
imslmDescr
imslmPktXFrame
imslmOverflow
imslmUnderflow
imIipParams
imipMode
imipGuardInterval
imipUsePartialReceptionFlag
imipMaxDelay
imipSyncId
imipStaticDelay
imipTimeOffset
imipLayers
imiplNumber
imiplTable
imiplEntry
imiplIndex
imiplDescr
imiplMod
imiplCodeRate
imiplTILength
imiplSegNum
imLocalParams
imlpMode
imlpGuardInterval
imlpUsePartialReceptionFlag
imlpUserDelay
RW
Version 1.1
Name
R/W
NA
Description
Enables the local editing of the Emergency switch on
control flag
Sets the Emergency switch on control flag
The number of Layers
Layer description
Number of packets per frame
Overflow
Underflow
IIP modulator mode.
IIP modulator guard interval.
IIP modulator use the Partial Reception Flag.
IIP maximum delay [100 ns].
IIP modulator use the Synchronization ID.
IIP modulator use the Time Reference.
IIP time offset [100 ns].
NA
The number of Layers
Layer description
Modulation scheme
Code rate of inner code
Time Interleaving length
Number of segments
RW
RW
RW
RW
Modulator mode.
Modulator guard interval.
Use the Partial Reception Flag.
User delay [100 ns].
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 160 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1
Name
imlpLayers
imlplNumber
imlplTable
imlplEntry
imlplIndex
imlplDescr
imlplMod
imlplCodeRate
imlplTILength
imlplSegNum
imCurrentParams
imcpMode
imcpGuardInterval
imcpUsePartialReceptionFlag
imcpSystemDelay
imcpLayers
imcplNumber
imcplTable
imcplEntry
imcplIndex
imcplDescr
imcplMod
imcplCodeRate
imcplTILength
imcplSegNum
ssbtItuModulation
itumVideoSettings
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1.1
itumvsWhitelevel
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1.2
itumvsSynchAmplitude
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1.3
itumvsPedesLevel
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.2
itumAudioSettings
itumasDeviation
itumasSoundSystem
RW
RW
Version 1.1
R/W
NA
Description
The number of Layers
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Layer description
Modulation scheme
Code rate of inner code
Time Interleaving length
Number of segments
Current modulator mode.
Current modulator guard interval.
Use the Partial Reception Flag.
Current system delay [100 ns].
NA
The number of Layers
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Layer description
Modulation scheme
Code rate of inner code
Time Interleaving length
Number of segments
White level [%] (range 10 to 22) = [(x*0.05) + 10] (x:
range 0 to 240)
Synch Amplitude [%] (range: 22 to 27,5) = [(x*0.05) + 20]
(x: range 40 to 150)
Pedes level [%] (range: 0 to 7) = (x*0.05) (x: range 0 to
140)
Audio deviation level
Sound System selector
Page 161 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
Name
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.3
itumasCarrierLevel1
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.4
itumasCarrierLevel2
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4
itumasEmphasis
itumasType
itumGroupDelay
itumgdCurveSelector
ssbtOutput
outputSettings
osOutputManagement
osomOutPower
osomRflManagement
RW
Description
Carrier Level 1 [dB] (range: -7 to -22) = [-1* (x/10)] (range
70 to 220)
Carrier Level 2 [dB] (range: -7 to -22) = [-1* (x/10)] (range
70 to 220)
Emphasis monitor
Selects the audio type
RW
Mode selector for group delay filter
RW
Output power
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.1
osomrmNumberAttempts
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.2
osomrmStatus
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.3
osomrmRflHigh
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.4
osomrmCurrNumAttempt
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.5
osomrmAttemptTimeout
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.6
osomrmReset
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.7
osomrmResetTimeout
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.5.1
osomT2Output
osomt2oRfChannel
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.5.2
osomt2RfFreqOff
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.6.1
osomTOutput
osomtoRfChannel
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.6.2
osomtoRfFreqOff
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.7.1
osomIOutput
osomioRfChannel
RW
Version 1.1
R/W
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Number of attempts to restore the system after a Reflex
Power warning
Reflex Power status
Shows if the Reflex Power High goes over the alarm
threshold
Shows the current number of attemp to restore the
system after a Reflex Power warning
Shows the coutdown expressed in seconds between two
attemps
Resets the output amplifier stage once the device is in
Reflex Power Alarm
Shows the coutdown expressed in seconds to come back
from Warning to Ok state
Output channel
Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz
up to 200 kHz)
Output channel
Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz
up to 200 kHz)
Output channel
Page 162 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
Name
R/W
Description
Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz
up to 200 kHz)
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.7.2
osomioRfFreqOff
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.8.1
osomAOutput
osomaoRfChannel
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.8.2
osomaoRfFreqOff
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9.1
osomItuOutput
osomituoRfChannel
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9.2
osomituoRfFreqOff
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.7.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.8.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.9.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.9.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2
osomituoOutPower
osT2TsProcessing
ost2tpDelNullPck
osT2TsMonitoring
ost2tmAsiOut1Sel
ost2tmAsiOut2Sel
osTTsProcessing
osttpDelNullPck
osTTsMonitoring
osttmAsiOut1Sel
osttmAsiOut2Sel
osITsProcessing
ositpDelNullPck
osITsMonitoring
ositmAsiOut1Sel
ositmAsiOut2Sel
osATsProcessing
osatpDelNullPck
osATsMonitoring
osatmAsiOut1Sel
osatmAsiOut2Sel
rf
rfEnable
rfStatus
testSignals
tsNumber
tsTable
RW
Output channel
Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz
up to 200 kHz)
Output power
RW
Delete null packets enable 0: disabled 1: enable
RW
RW
The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector
The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector
RW
Delete null packets enable 0: disabled 1: enable
RW
RW
The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector
The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector
RW
Delete null packets enable 0: disabled 1: enable
RW
RW
The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector
The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector
RW
Delete null packets enable 0: disabled 1: enable
RW
RW
The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector
The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector
RW
RF output enable 0: disabled 1: enabled
RF output status 0: off 1: on
NA
Number of available test signals.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Output channel
Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (1Hz steps, from
-200 kHz to 200 kHz)
Page 163 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.4
Version 1.1
Name
tsEntry
tsIndex
tsDescr
tsEnable
tsItu
video
videoTestSel
audio
audioToneEnable
audioToneRight
audioToneLeft
audioMuteEnable
its
itsEnable
its0
its1
its2
its3
its4
outputMonitor
omFwdPower
omAgcMode
omAgcOn
standBy
sbEnable
sbStatus
ssbtTsOverIP
inputChannels
icIgmpEnable
icNumber
icTable
icEntry
icIndex
icDescr
icLocalIpAddr
icLocalPort
R/W
Description
RW
Test signal description.
Test signal enable 0: disabled 1: enabled.
RW
Video test signal selector
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enables the audio test tones
Right tone frequency (range:0 to127) [unit x 100Hz]
Left tone frequency (range:0 to127) [unit x 100Hz]
Enables the audio muting
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enables ITS test signal insertion
ITS number 0 position
ITS number 1 position
ITS number 2 position
ITS number 3 position
ITS number 4 position
Forward power [dBm x 10] indicator
AGC mode status 0: analog 1: digital
Auto AGC status 0: off 1: on
RW
LCD stand-by button enable
Current device mode
RW
NA
IGMP enable
Number of input Ethernet channels.
RW
RW
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Description of input channel
IP address
Port
Page 164 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.9
Name
icSourceClkReference
outputChannels
ocPort
ocNumber
ocTable
ocEntry
ocIndex
ocDescr
ocStatus
ocDestIpAddr
ocDestPhysAddr
ocDestPort
ocInputSelector
ocProtocol
ocPckFormat
R/W
RW
Description
Source clock reference selector
RW
NA
UDP port
Number of output Ethernet channels.
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.10
ocPckPerFrame
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.3
ocSsrc
ocSourceClkReference
ocEnable
ssbtT2Modulation
t2mSettings
t2msUseT2Mi
t2msMiPid
t2msNetworkMode
RW
RW
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.4
t2msPresetConfig
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.7
t2msPresetConfigNum
t2msConfigChanged
t2msLoadConfig
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.8
t2msAutoRegen
RW
Version 1.1
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Description of output channel
Tansmission state
Destination IP address
Destination MAC address
Destination port
Input selector
Transmission protocol
Packet format
Number of TS packets per frame (when the packet format
is 204, the maximum number of packets per frame is 6)
SSRC identifier
Source clock reference selector
Transmission enable
T2-MI enable 0: disabled 1: enabled
T2-MI PID setting
Transmitter mode selection 0 : MFN 1: SFN
Enables the use of preset configurations when the T2-MI
is disabled
Configuration number selector
Shows the status of the configuration
Load configuration command
Enables the Automatic Regeneration function. This
funcion allows to retrieve the configuration
data from the input demodulator and to automatically
increment the REGEN_FLAG field of the L1-Pre
signalling."
Page 165 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
Name
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.9
t2msAutoRfLoop
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.6
t2msPidMode
t2mspmAutoPidEn
t2mspmDetectedPid
t2mspmUsedPid
t2mspmStatus
t2mspmError
t2mCurrentParameters
t2mcpSource
t2mcpL1Pre
t2mcpL1PreType
t2mcpL1PreBwt
t2mcpL1PreS1
t2mcpL1PreS2
t2mcpL1PreFftSize
t2mcpL1PreMixed
t2mcpL1PreL1Repeat
t2mcpL1PreGuardInterval
t2mcpL1PrePapr
t2mcpL1PreL1Mod
t2mcpL1PreL1CodeRate
t2mcpL1PreL1Fec
t2mcpL1PreL1PostSize
t2mcpL1PreL1PostInfoSize
t2mCurrentParameters
t2mcpSource
t2mcpL1Pre
t2mcpL1PreType
t2mcpL1PreBwt
t2mcpL1PreS1
t2mcpL1PreS2
t2mcpL1PreFftSize
t2mcpL1PreMixed
Version 1.1
R/W
RW
Description
Enables the Automatic Frequency Loop function. This
funcion allows to
automatically set the FREQUENCY field of the L1-Post
signalling to the
currently used RF output frequency."
RW
Enables the automatic detection of the T2-MI PID
Shows the detected T2-MI PID
Shows the currently used T2-MI PID
Shows the status of the T2-MI PID mode
Automatic T2-MI PID mode error
Current parameters source
Input stream type
BWT extension indicator
S1 field
S2 field
FFT size
Mixed indicator
L1 repeat enable flag
Guard Interval
PAPR
L1 modulation scheme
L1 code rate
L1 FEC Type
L1 Post Size
L1 Post Info Size
Current parameters source
Input stream type
BWT extension indicator
S1 field
S2 field
FFT size
Mixed indicator
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 166 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.22
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.23
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.24
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.25
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1.1
Version 1.1
Name
t2mcpL1PreL1Repeat
t2mcpL1PreGuardInterval
t2mcpL1PrePapr
t2mcpL1PreL1Mod
t2mcpL1PreL1CodeRate
t2mcpL1PreL1Fec
t2mcpL1PreL1PostSize
t2mcpL1PreL1PostInfoSize
t2mcpL1PrePilotPattern
t2mcpL1PreTxIdAvailability
t2mcpL1PreCellId
t2mcpL1PreT2NetworkId
t2mcpL1PreT2SystemId
t2mcpL1PreNumT2Frames
t2mcpL1PreNumDataSymb
t2mcpL1PreRegenFlag
t2mcpL1PreL1PostExt
t2mcpL1PreRfIndex
t2mcpL1PreT2Version
t2mcpL1Post
t2mcpL1PostSubSliceNum
t2mcpL1PostFefType
t2mcpL1PostFefLength
t2mcpL1PostFefInterval
t2mcpL1PostAux
t2mcpL1PostAuxNum
t2mcpL1PostAuxTable
t2mcpL1PostAuxEntry
t2mcpL1PostAuxIndex
t2mcpL1PostAuxStreamType
t2mcpL1PostAuxPrivateConf
t2mcpL1PostRf
t2mcpL1PostNumRf
t2mcpL1PostRfTable
t2mcpL1PostRfEntry
t2mcpL1PostRfIndex
R/W
Description
L1 repeat enable flag
Guard Interval
PAPR
L1 modulation scheme
L1 code rate
L1 FEC Type
L1 Post Size
L1 Post Info Size
Pilot Pattern
TX Id
Cell Id
T2 Network Id
T2 System Id
Number of T2 frames
Number of data symbols
Regeneration count indicator
L1 Post extension enabled
The current RF index
T2 version
Number of sub-slices per frame
The type of the associated FEF part
FEF length
FEF interval
NA
Number of AUXs
NA
The type of the current auxiliary stream
RFU
The number of RF frequencies in use
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 167 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.7
Version 1.1
Name
t2mcpL1PostRfIdx
t2mcpL1PostFrequency
t2mcpL1PostPlp
t2mcpL1PostPlpNum
t2mcpL1PostPlpTable
t2mcpL1PostPlpEntry
t2mcpL1PostPlpIndex
t2mcpL1PostPlpId
t2mcpL1PostPlpType
t2mcpL1PostPlpPayloadType
t2mcpL1PostFfFlag
t2mcpL1PostFirstRfIdx
t2mcpL1PostFirstFrameIdx
t2mcpL1PostGroupId
t2mcpL1PostPlpCod
t2mcpL1PostPlpMod
t2mcpL1PostPlpRotation
t2mcpL1PostPlpFec
t2mcpL1PostNumBlocksMax
t2mcpL1PostFrameInterval
t2mcpL1PostTimeIntLength
t2mcpL1PostTimeIntType
t2mcpL1PostInbandA
t2mcpL1PostInbandB
t2mcpL1PostPlpMode
t2mcpL1PostStaticFlag
t2mcpL1PostStaticPaddFlag
t2mLocal
t2mlL1Pre
t2mlL1PreType
t2mlL1PreBwt
t2mlL1PreS1
t2mlL1PreS2
t2mlL1PreFftSize
t2mlL1PreMixed
t2mlL1PreL1Repeat
R/W
Description
RF index
Frequency
NA
Number of PLPs
PLP ID
PLP type
PLP payload type
FF flag
First RF index
First frame index
PLP group id
The code rate used by the associated PLP
The modulation used by the associated PLP
DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator
The FEC type used by the associated PLP
Maximum number of PLP blocks
Frame interval
Time interleaving length
Time interleaving type
In-band A flag
In-band B flag
PLP mode
Static flag
Static padding flag
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Input stream type
BWT extension indicator
S1 field
S2 field
FFT size
Mixed indicator
L1 repeat enable flag
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 168 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.22
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.23
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.24
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.25
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1.2
Version 1.1
Name
t2mlL1PreGuardInterval
t2mlL1PrePapr
t2mlL1PreL1Mod
t2mlL1PreL1CodeRate
t2mlL1PreL1Fec
t2mlL1PreL1PostSize
t2mlL1PreL1PostInfoSize
t2mlL1PrePilotPattern
t2mlL1PreTxIdAvailability
t2mlL1PreCellId
t2mlL1PreT2NetworkId
t2mlL1PreT2SystemId
t2mlL1PreNumT2Frames
t2mlL1PreNumDataSymb
t2mlL1PreRegenFlag
t2mlL1PreL1PostExt
t2mlL1PreRfIndex
t2mlL1PreT2Version
t2mlL1Post
t2mlL1PostSubSliceNum
t2mlL1PostFefType
t2mlL1PostFefLength
t2mlL1PostFefInterval
t2mlL1PostAux
t2LL1PostAuxNum
t2LL1PostAuxTable
t2LL1PostAuxEntry
t2LL1PostAuxIndex
t2LL1PostAuxStreamType
t2LL1PostAuxPrivateConf
t2mlL1PostRf
t2LL1PostNumRf
t2LL1PostRfTable
t2LL1PostRfEntry
t2LL1PostRfIndex
t2LL1PostRfIdx
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Description
Guard Interval
PAPR
L1 modulation scheme
L1 code rate
L1 FEC Type
L1 Post Size
L1 Post Info Size
Pilot Pattern
TX Id
Cell Id
T2 Network Id
T2 System Id
Number of T2 frames
Number of data symbols
Regeneration count indicator
L1 Post extension enabled
The current RF index
T2 version
RW
RW
RW
RW
Number of sub-slices per frame
The type of the associated FEF part
FEF length
FEF interval
RW
NA
Number of AUXs
RW
RW
RW
NA
RW
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
The type of the current auxiliary stream
RFU
The number of RF frequencies in use
RF index
Page 169 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.22
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.23
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.24
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.25
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.26
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315
Version 1.1
Name
t2LL1PostFrequency
t2mlL1PostPlp
t2mlL1PostPlpNum
t2mlL1PostPlpTable
t2mlL1PostPlpEntry
t2mlL1PostPlpIndex
t2mlL1StreamFormat
t2mlL1SisMis
t2mlL1CcmAcm
t2mlL1Issyi
t2mlL1Npd
t2mlL1PostPlpId
t2mlL1PostPlpType
t2mlL1PostPlpPayloadType
t2mlL1PostFfFlag
t2mlL1PostFirstRfIdx
t2mlL1PostFirstFrameIdx
t2mlL1PostGroupId
t2mlL1PostPlpCod
t2mlL1PostPlpMod
t2mlL1PostPlpRotation
t2mlL1PostPlpFec
t2mlL1PostNumBlocksMax
t2mlL1PostFrameInterval
t2mlL1PostTimeIntLength
t2mlL1PostTimeIntType
t2mlL1PostInbandA
t2mlL1PostInbandB
t2mlL1PostPlpMode
t2mlL1PostStaticFlag
t2mlL1PostStaticPaddFlag
t2mlFunctions
t2mlfTxIdentifier
t2mlfTxMisoGroup
misoGroup
ssbtMeasure
R/W
RW
RW
NA
Description
Frequency
Number of PLPs
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Input stream format
Single or multiple input streams
Input stream format
Input stream sinchronization indicator
Null packet deletion
PLP ID
PLP type
PLP payload type
FF flag
First RF index
First frame index
PLP group id
The code rate used by the associated PLP
The modulation used by the associated PLP
DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator
The FEC type used by the associated PLP
Maximum number of PLP blocks
Frame interval
Time interleaving length
Time interleaving type
In-band A flag
In-band B flag
PLP mode
Static flag
Static padding flag
RW
Transmitter identifier
RW
MISO group
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 170 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1
t2Measure
t2mStatistics
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.1
meas1RxLevel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.2
meas2RxLevel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.16
measCarrierOffset
measIfAgc
measRfAgc
measTsLock
measSyncStat
measMer
measSnr
measPreLdpcBer
measPostBchFer
measPreBchBer
measDemodPpm
measSignalQuality
measLdpcIter
t2mL1Pre
t2mL1PreType
t2mL1PreBwt
t2mL1PreS1
t2mL1PreS2
t2mL1PreFftSize
t2mL1PreMixed
t2mL1PreL1Repeat
t2mL1PreGuardInterval
t2mL1PrePapr
t2mL1PreL1Mod
t2mL1PreL1CodeRate
t2mL1PreL1Fec
t2mL1PreL1PostSize
t2mL1PreL1PostInfoSize
t2mL1PrePilotPattern
t2mL1PreTxIdAvailability
Output RX level 127: over input -128: low power 63...62: power expressed in dB
Output RX level 127: over input -128: low power 63...62: power expressed in dB
Output carrier offset
Output IF AGC level
Output RF AGC level
Demodulated TS Lock
Sync statistics
Output MER [dBx1e3]
Output SNR [dBx1e3]
Output Pre LDPC BER [1e7]
Output Post BCH FER [1e6]
Output Pre BCH BER [1e9]
Demodulated PPM [ppmx1e2]
Signal quality [%]
LDPC iterations per minute
Input stream type
BWT extension indicator
S1 field
S2 field
FFT size
Mixed indicator
L1 repeat enable flag
Guard Interval
PAPR
L1 modulation scheme
L1 code rate
L1 FEC Type
L1 Post Size
L1 Post Info Size
Pilot Pattern
TX Id
Version 1.1
Name
R/W
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Description
Page 171 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.22
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.23
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.24
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.5
Version 1.1
Name
t2mL1PreCellId
t2mL1PreT2NetworkId
t2mL1PreT2SystemId
t2mL1PreNumT2Frames
t2mL1PreNumDataSymb
t2mL1PreRegenFlag
t2mL1PreL1PostExt
t2mL1PreRfIndex
t2mL1Post
t2mL1PostSubSliceNum
t2mL1PostFefType
t2mL1PostFefLength
t2mL1PostFefInterval
t2mL1PostAux
t2mL1PostAuxNum
t2mL1PostAuxTable
t2mL1PostAuxEntry
t2mL1PostAuxIndex
t2mL1PostAuxStreamType
t2mL1PostAuxPrivateConf
t2mL1PostRf
t2mL1PostNumRf
t2mL1PostRfTable
t2mL1PostRfEntry
t2mL1PostRfIndex
t2mL1PostRfIdx
t2mL1PostFrequency
t2mL1PostPlp
t2mL1PostPlpNum
t2mL1PostPlpTable
t2mL1PostPlpEntry
t2mL1PostPlpIndex
t2mL1PostPlpId
t2mL1PostPlpType
t2mL1PostPlpPayloadType
t2mL1PostFfFlag
R/W
Description
Cell Id
T2 Network Id
T2 System Id
Number of T2 frames
Number of data symbols
Regeneration count indicator
L1 Post extension enabled
The current RF index
Number of sub-slices per frame
The type of the associated FEF part
FEF length
FEF interval
NA
Number of AUXs
NA
NA
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
The type of the current auxiliary stream
RFU
The number of RF frequencies in use
RF index
Frequency
Number of PLPs
PLP ID
PLP type
PLP payload type
FF flag
Page 172 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.14
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.18
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.19
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.20
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.21
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1
Name
t2mL1PostFirstRfIdx
t2mL1PostFirstFrameIdx
t2mL1PostGroupId
t2mL1PostPlpCod
t2mL1PostPlpMod
t2mL1PostPlpRotation
t2mL1PostPlpFec
t2mL1PostNumBlocksMax
t2mL1PostFrameInterval
t2mL1PostTimeIntLength
t2mL1PostTimeIntType
t2mL1PostInbandA
t2mL1PostInbandB
t2mL1PostPlpMode
t2mL1PostStaticFlag
t2mL1PostStaticPaddFlag
tMeasure
tmStatistics
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.1
tmsRxLevel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.12
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.13
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.3
tmsCarrierOffset
tmsIfAgc
tmsRfAgc
tmsTsLock
tmsSyncStat
tmsMer
tmsSnr
tmsPreVitBer
tmsPreRsBer
tmsRsErrCount
tmsDemodPpm
tmsSignalQuality
tmDemodParams
tmdpConstellation
tmdpHierMode
tmdpHpCodeRate
Output RX level 127: over input -128: low power 63...62: power expressed in dB
Output carrier offset
Output IF AGC level
Output RF AGC level
Demodulated TS Lock
Sync statistics
Output MER [dBx1e3]
Output SNR [dBx1e3]
Output Pre LDPC BER [1e7]
Output Post BCH FER [1e6]
Output Pre BCH BER [1e9]
Demodulated PPM [ppmx1e2]
Signal quality [%]
Constellation for current modulation scheme
Hierarchy information for current modulation scheme
High Priority Code Rate
Version 1.1
R/W
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Description
First RF index
First frame index
PLP group id
The code rate used by the associated PLP
The modulation used by the associated PLP
DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator
The FEC type used by the associated PLP
Maximum number of PLP blocks
Frame interval
Time interleaving length
Time interleaving type
In-band A flag
In-band B flag
PLP mode
Static flag
Static padding flag
Page 173 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1
Name
tmdpLpCodeRate
tmdpFft
tmdpGuardInterval
tmdpCelllId
isdbtMeasure
imStatistics
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.1
imsMonTxLevel
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.4
imsIfLevel
imsIfAgcDac
imsDemState
imsMode
imsGuardInterval
imsSTRFreqErr
imsCRFreqErr
imsCN
imLayerStatistics
imlsNumber
imlsTable
imlsEntry
imlsIndex
imlsDescr
imlsMod
imlsCodeRate
imlsTILength
imlsSegNum
imlsMer
imlsPreVitBer
imlsPostVitBer
imlsPktErrRate
atscMeasure
amStatistics
amsFrequencyOffset
amsDemodStatus
amsEqStatus
amsDemLock
Version 1.1
R/W
NA
Description
Low Priority Code Rate
FFT size
Guard interval
Cell identifier
Output TX level monitor 127: over input -128: low power
-63...62: power expressed in dB
Measured IF level
Measured IF AGC output DAC value
The state of the Meausure board sequencer
Mode
Guard interval
Frequency error detected by symbol timing recovery [Hz]
Frequency error detected by carrier recovery [kHz]
Estimated Carrier to Noise ratio (dB x 10)
The number of Layers
Layer description
Modulation scheme
Code rate
Time Interleaving length
Number of segments
MER [dB] (* 10)
Pre-Viterbi BER (* 10^9)
Post-Viterbi BER (* 10^9)
Packet Error Rate (* 10^9)
Output carrier offset
VSB demodulation status
Equalizer status
Demodulator lock status
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 174 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.11
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.1
Name
amsAgcLock
amsFrameLock
amsCarrierFreqLoopLock
amsTimingFreqLoopLock
amsSnr
amsSer
amsBer
ssbtCommon
info
infoName
infoManufacturer
infoVersion
versionNumber
versionTable
versionEntry
versionIndex
versionDescr
versionVersion
infoHw
hwNumber
hwTable
hwEntry
hwIndex
hwDescr
hwSerialNumber
hwUniqueId
settings
sDate
sSystem
ssLoadConfig
ssSaveConfig
ssReset
events
evNumber
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.2
evOverwritten
Version 1.1
R/W
Description
Digital AGC lock status
Frame lock status
Carrier frequency loop lock status
Timing frequency loop lock status
Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]
Segment Error Rate
Bit Error Rate
RW
The station identifier
Manufacturer name
NA
Number of software versions
Software version index
Software description
Software version
NA
Number of devices
Device index
Device description
Serial number
Unique device ID
RW
Device date and time as specified in SNMPv2-TC
Load configuration
Save configuration
Reset board
The total number of alarms
The events list has been overwritten. Obsolete events
began to be overwritten."
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 175 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.5
evPageSel
evTable
evEntry
evIndex
evNum
evDate
evCode
evDescr
alarms
alNumber
alSeverityStatus
alThresholds
altNumber
altTable
altEntry
altIndex
altDescr
altAlarmCode
altMeasUnit
altSetting
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4
alTable
NA
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.5
alEntry
alIndex
alStatus
alCode
alDescr
alSeverity
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.6
alTrapManager1
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.7
alTrapManager2
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.8
alTrapManager3
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.9
alR0Enable
RW
Version 1.1
Name
R/W
RW
NA
Events page selector
Events table
Event index
Event number.
Event date and time as specified in SNMPv2-TC
Event code
Event description
The total number of alarms
Maximum severity
NA
Number of alarm thresholds
Alarm thresholds table
RW
Threshold index
Threshold description
Code of the alarm this threshold is referred to
Temperature unit of measurement
Threshold setting
Alarms table. This table contains all alarms that can be
managed by screen service devices"
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Description
Alarm index
Alarm status
Alarm code
Alarm description
Severity associated to the alarm
Enables trap messages to be sent to the manager with IP
address 1"
Enables trap messages to be sent to the manager with IP
address 2"
Enables trap messages to be sent to the manager with IP
address 3"
Enables relay 0 to be switched on/off depending on the
status of this alarm"
Page 176 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
Name
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.10
alR1Enable
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.11
alR2Enable
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.12
alR3Enable
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.13
alFrontPanelEnable
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.14
alJavaEnable
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.15
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.16
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.17
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3
alEventEnable
alRfOffEnable
alAutoSwitchEnable
snmp
managerTrapNumber
managerTrapTable
managerTrapEntry
managerTrapIndex
managerTrapIp
traps
RW
RW
RW
Description
Enables relay 1 to be switched on/off depending on the
status of this alarm"
Enables relay 2 to be switched on/off depending on the
status of this alarm"
Enables relay 3 to be switched on/off depending on the
status of this alarm"
Enables this alarm to be notified on LCD display
Enables this alarm to be notified on the Java alarm page
icon"
Enables this alarm to be notified through an event
Enables this alarm to switch off the output RF signal
Enables this alarm to trigger the automatic input switching
NA
Number of manager Trap IP addresses
Manager Trap IP addresses table
RW
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3.1
alarmTraps1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3.2
alarmTraps2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3.3
alarmTraps3
SNMP Manager index
SNMP Manager IP listening address
"Traps section"
Traps definition for Trap Manager 1. An alarmTrap1 trap
signifies that the sending protocol entity
recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the
alarms table."
Traps definition for Trap Manager 2. An alarmTrap2 trap
signifies that the sending protocol entity
recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the
alarms table."
Traps definition for Trap Manager 3. An alarmTrap3 trap
signifies that the sending protocol entity
recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the
alarms table."
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1
mode
transmissionMode
modesManagement
mmNumber
mmTable
mmEntry
RW
The transmission mode of the device
NA
Number of available modes
Modes management table
Version 1.1
R/W
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 177 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.5
mmIndex
mmType
mmStatus
ssbtNetwork
netInterfaces
nifNumber
nifTable
nifEntry
nifIndex
nifDescr
nifType
nifIpAddr
nifPhysAddr
Mode index
Mode type
Mode status
NA
The number of network interfaces
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.6
nifNetMask
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.8
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.9
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.10
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.1
nifGateway
nifSpeed
nifInPkts
nifInErr
ssbtTModulation
tmSettings
tmsNetworkMode
tmsMip
tmsmHPStatus
tmsmLPStatus
tmMipParameters
tmmpModulationParameters
tmmpmpFft
tmmpmpConstellation
tmmpmpBandwidth
tmmpmpFecHp
tmmpmpFecLp
tmmpmpAlpha
tmmpmpGuardInterval
tmmpDvbhParameters
tmmpdpTimeSlicingHp
Interface description
The type of interface
The IP address of this entry
The physical address of this entry
The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this
entry
The gateway IP address of this entry
The current bandwidth of this interface
The number of packets delivered to higher-level protocol
The number of inbound packets that contained errors
RW
Network mode
High Priority MIP status
Low Priority MIP status
MIP FFT size
MIP Constellation
MIP bandwidth
MIP High Priority Code Rate
MIP Low Priority Code Rate
MIP hierarchy information for current modulation scheme
MIP guard interval
MIP High Priority Time Slicing
Version 1.1
Name
R/W
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Description
Page 178 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.5.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.5.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3
Version 1.1
Name
tmmpdpTimeSlicingLp
tmmpdpMpeFecHp
tmmpdpMpeFecLp
tmmpdpInterleaver
tmmpMipFunctions
tmmpmfTxId
tmmpmftiNumber
tmmpmftiEnableTxId0
tmmpmfCellId
tmmpmfciEnable
tmmpmfciFunctionEnable
tmmpmfciFunctionTag
tmmpmfciStatus
tmmpmfciWaitForEnable
tmmpmfMaxDelay
tmmpmfFrequencyOffset
tmmpmffoEnable
tmmpmffoStatus
tmmpmfTimeOffset
tmmpmftoEnable
tmmpmftoStatus
tmLocalParameters
tmlpModulationParameters
tmlpmpFft
tmlpmpConstellation
tmlpmpFecHp
tmlpmpFecLP
tmlpmpAlpha
tmlpmpGuardInterval
tmlpDvbhParameters
tmlpdpTimeSlicingHp
tmlpdpTimeSlicingLp
tmlpdpMpeFecHp
tmlpdpMpeFecLp
tmlpdpInterleaver
tmlpMipFunctions
R/W
Description
MIP Low Priority Time Slicing
High Priority MPE-FEC
Low Priority MPE-FEC
MIP native/in-depth symbol interleaver selector
RW
RW
Transmitter identifier
Enables the TX ID 0
RW
Enables the Cell ID function
Enable function status
Cell id function tag detection status
Cell id function
Cell id function wait for enable status
MIP maximum delay [100ns]
RW
Enables the MIP frequency offset function
MIP frequency offset function [Hz]
RW
Enables the MIP time offset function
MIP time offset function [100ns]
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
FFT size
Constellation
High Priority Code Rate
Low Priority Code Rate
Hierarchy information for current modulation scheme
Guard interval
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enables the High Priority Time Slicing
Enables the Low Priority Time Slicing
Enables the High Priority MPE-FEC
Enables the Low Priority MPE-FEC
Symbol interleaver selector
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 179 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.7
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.1
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.3
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.4
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.5
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.6
1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.7
Version 1.1
Name
tmlpmfCellIdEnable
tmlpmfCellId
tmlpmflDelay
tmlpmfFrequencyOffset
tmlpmfTimeOffset
tmCurrentParameters
tmcpModulationParameters
tmcpmpFft
tmcpmpConstellation
tmcpmpBandwidth
tmcpmpFecHp
tmcpmpFecLp
tmcpmpAlpha
tmcpmpGuardInterval
tmcpDvbhParameters
tmcpdpTimeSlicingHp
tmcpdpTimeSlicingLp
tmcpdpMpeFecHp
tmcpdpMpeFecLp
tmcpdpInterleaver
tmcpsMipFunctions
tmcpmfCellId
tmcpmfSystemDelay
tmcpmfFrequencyOffset
tmcpmfTimeOffset
tmcpmfCentreFrequency
tmcpmfNetworkDelay
tmcpmfDeviceDelay
R/W
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Description
Enables the use of the locally set Cell ID
Local cell id setting
User delay setting 100ns]
Frequency offset setting [Hz]
Time offset setting [100ns]
Used transmission mode
Used constellation
Used bandwidth
Used High Priority Code Rate
Used Low Priority Code Rate
Used hierarchical mode
Used guard interval
Used High Priority Time Slicing
Used Low Priority Time Slicing
Used High Priority MPE-FEC
Used Low Priority MPE-FEC
Used symbol interleaver
Used Cell ID
System delay indicator [100ns]
Used frequency offset
Used time offset [100ns]
Centre frequency indicator (expressed in Hz)
Network delay [100ns] indicator
Shows the device delay [100ns]
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 180 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.3 Events Monitoring
In MIB ssbtCommon the events node allows the monitoring of events.
evNumber object specifies the total number of events stored in memory.
evOverwritten object notifies if the events list exceeded the memory limit. If this object returns “1”, obsolete
events have begun to be overwritten.
evPageSel object selects which page has to be monitored through the events table. Each page is composed by 16
events.
The total number of entries of the evTable is fixed to 16. Each entry in the table is defined as follows:
EvEntry ::= SEQUENCE {
evIndex INTEGER,
evNum INTEGER,
evDate DateAndTime,
evCode EvType,
evDescr DisplayString
evIndex is the index of the specific entry.
evNum object specifies the numerical order of the specific entry.
evDate object provides the date and time of the event generation as specified in SNMv2-TC.
evCode object provides the Type of the specific entry (ref. to Events chapter for further information).
evDescr object provides the Description of the specific entry (ref. to Events chapter for further information).
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 181 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.4 Configuring alarm masks and alarm thresholds
In ssbtCommon MIB the alarms node allows the monitoring of alarms status, the setting of alarm masks and
thresholds.
7.4.1 Alarms Table
The alTable table is used to monitor alarms status and to set alarm masks. alNumber object specifies the total
number of entries in the alarms table. alSeverityStatus specifies the maximum severity of currently raised
alarms. Each entry in the table is defined as follows:
AlEntry ::= SEQUENCE {
alIndex INTEGER,
alStatus OnOff,
alCode INTEGER,
alDescr DisplayString,
alSeverity Severity,
alTrapManager1 EnDis,
alTrapManager2 EnDis,
alTrapManager3 EnDis,
alR1Enable EnDis,
alR2Enable EnDis,
alR3Enable EnDis,
alR4Enable EnDis,
alFrontPanelEnable EnDis,
alJavaEnable EnDis,
alEventEnable EnDis,
alRfOffEnable EnDis,
alAutoSwitchEnable EnDis
alIndex is the index of the specific entry.
alStatus object shows the alarm status (on/off).
alCode object univocally identifies the alarm (refer to Alarms Code and Description table).
alDescr object provides a textual description of the specific entry (refer to Alarms Code and Description table for
the complete list of alarms descriptions).
alSeverity defines the severity associated to the alarm.
alTrapManager1 object allows to enable trap messages, associated to the entry, to be sent to the manager with
IP address 1
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 182 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
alTrapManager2 object allows to enable trap messages, associated to the entry, to be sent to the manager with
IP address 2
alTrapManager3 object allows to enable trap messages, associated to the entry, to be sent to the manager with
IP address 3
alR0Enable, alR1Enable, alR2Enable, alR3Enable objects enable relay 0, 1, 2, 3 respectively, to be switched
on/off depending on the status of this entry.
alFrontPanelEnable object enables the alarm to be notified on LCD display lighting the alarm button and listing
the alarms in the Alarms menu.
alJavaEnable enables the alarm to be notified on the Java alarm page icon.
alEventEnable enables the alarm to be notified through an event.
alRfOffEnable enables the entry to switch off the RF output.
alAutoSwitchEnable enables the entry to trigger the automatic input switching.
Alarms are divided in two different classes: common alarms and mode-specific alarms. Common alarms are
those which are HW dependant or are dependent on how the operating system has been designed. Common
alarms are shared by all the operational modes. Mode-specific alarms are those which depend on the
implemented functionalities and standards. Mode-specific alarms can be easily recognized thanks to the
addition of the mode prefix enclosed in squared brackets.
The alarms table lists both common and mode-specific alarms. Indexes of alarms may change from one
operational mode to another, but alarm codes do not. Alarm codes of common alarms are the same whatever
the working mode. Alarm codes of mode-specific alarms uniquely identify the specific alarm and are not shared
by operational modes.
Table 31.
alDescr
Alarms Code and Description
Alarm Description
Alarm Code
Temp. High
Temperature High Alarm
Temp. High -3dB
Temperature Level -3db
Temp. High Warning
Temperature High Warning
Fans Speed Low
Fans Speed Low
Alim Dialog Err
Alim Dialog Err
FE Dialog Err
FE Dialog Err
Meas Dialog Err
Meas Dialog Err
GPS Dialog Err
GPS Dialog Err
GPS Not Locked
GPS Not Locked
120MHz Not Locked
120MHz Not Locked
960MHz Not Locked
960MHz Not Locked
10
Input PLL Not Locked
Input PLL Not Locked
11
Out PLL Not Locked
Output PLL Not Locked
12
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 183 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
alDescr
Alarm Description
Alarm Code
10MHz Not Locked
10MHz Not Locked
13
1PPS Not Locked
1 PPS Not Locked
14
FPGA Boot Err
FPGA Boot Error
15
FWD Power High
Forward Power High
16
FWD Pwr Low Warning
Forward Power Low Warning
17
FWD Pwr Low
Forward Power Low Alarm
18
Reflex Power High
Reflex Power High
19
File System Err
File System Error
20
File Err
Bad File In File System
21
PS1 V Out Of Range
PS Voltage Out Of Range
22
PS1 I Out Of Range
PS Current Out Of Range
23
CPU Fan Err
CPU Fan Error
24
Test Mode
Test Mode
25
FE S2 Not Locked
FE S2 not locked
26
FE S2 S/N Low
FE S2 SNR Low
27
FE S2 BER High
FE S2 BER high
28
[ATSC] No Input
[ATSC] Input not valid
1056
[ATSC] Input Overflow
[ATSC] Input overflow
1057
[ATSC] MH Err
[ATSC] MH Error
1058
[ATSC] MEAS Demodulator Not Locked
[ATSC] Meas Not Locked
1059
[ATSC] MEAS SNR Low
[ATSC] Meas SNR Low
1060
[ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked
[ATSC] FE Not Locked
1061
[ATSC] FE SNR Low
[ATSC] FE SNR Low
1062
[ATSC] TVCT Not Present
[ATSC] No TVCT
1063
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 184 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.4.2 Thresholds Table
The alThresholds subtree is used to set alarms thresholds. altNumber object specifies the total number of entries
in the alarm thresholds table. Each entry in the table is defined as follows:
AltEntry ::= SEQUENCE {
altIndex INTEGER,
altDescr DisplayString,
altAlarmCode INTEGER,
altMeasUnit MeasureType,
altSetting INTEGER
altIndex is the index of the specific entry.
altDescr object provides a textual description of the specific entry (refer to Alarm Thresholds Description table
for the complete list of thresholds descriptions).
altAlarmCode object univocally identifies the alarm this threshold refers to (refer to Alarms Code and
Description table).
altMeasUnit object specifies the unit of measurement of the entry.
altSetting object is used to set the threshold.
The thresholds table lists both common and mode-specific alarm thresholds. Indexes of thresholds may change
from one operational mode to another, but alarm codes of the alarms they refer to do not. Alarm codes of
common alarms are the same whatever the working mode. Alarm codes of mode-specific alarms uniquely
identify the specific alarm and are not shared by operational modes.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 185 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Table 32.
altDescr
Alarm Thresholds Description
Threshold Description
Alarm Code
Temp. High -3dB
Temperature warning threshold expressed in °C.
Temp. High Warning
Temperature alarm threshold expressed in °C.
FWD Pwr Low Warning
Forward power warning threshold expressed in dB.
17
FWD Pwr Low
Forward power alarm threshold expressed in dB.
18
FE Squelch
[DVB-T2] FE Squelch alarm threshold expressed in dB.
1315
FE Pre LDPC BER
[DVB-T2] FE Pre LDPC BER alarm threshold expressed in
dB*1e7.
1316
FE SNR Low
[DVB-T2] FE Signal to Noise alarm threshold expressed in
dB*1e3.
1317
FE MER Low
[DVB-T2] FE MER alarm threshold expressed in dB*1e3.
1318
FE S.Quality Low
[DVB-T2] FE Signal Quality alarm threshold.
1319
Meas Pre LDPC BER
[DVB-T2] Measure Pre LDPC BER alarm threshold
expressed in dB*1e7.
1321
Meas SNR Low
[DVB-T2] Measure Signal to Noise alarm threshold
expressed in dB*1e3.
1322
Meas MER Low
[DVB-T2] Measure MER alarm threshold expressed in
dB*1e3.
1323
Meas S.Quality Low
[DVB-T2] Measure Signal Quality alarm threshold.
1324
FE LDPC Mean Err
[DVB-T2] FE LDPC Mean Error alarm threshold
1330
MEAS LDPC Mean Err
[DVB-T2] Measure LDPC Mean Error alarm threshold
1331
FE Squelch
[DVB-T] FE Squelch alarm threshold.
809
FE Pre Viterbi BER
[DVB-T] FE PreViterbi BER High alarm threshold
(expressed in dB*1e7).
810
FE SNR Low
[DVB-T] FE SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in
dB*1e3).
811
FE MER Low
[DVB-T] FE MER Low alarm threshold (expressed in
dB*1e3).
812
FE S.Quality Low
[DVB-T] FE Signal Quality Low alarm threshold.
813
Meas Pre Viterbi BER
[DVB-T] MEAS PreViterbi BER High alarm threshold
(expressed in dB*1e7).
815
Meas SNR Low
[DVB-T] MEAS SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in
dB*1e3).
816
Meas MER Low
[DVB-T] MEAS MER Low alarm threshold (expressed in
dB*1e3).
817
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 186 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
altDescr
Threshold Description
Alarm Code
Meas S.Quality Low
[DVB-T] MEAS Signal Quality Low alarm threshold.
818
FE SNR Low
[ATSC] FE SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in
dB*1e3).
1062
Meas SNR Low
[ATSC] MEAS SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in
dB*1e3).
1060
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 187 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.5 Traps
While a management station can poll, at fixed time interval, all the agents it knows for some key information,
each agent is responsible for notifying the management station of any alarm condition. These events are
communicated in SNMP messages known as traps.
The following parameters shall be set in order to correctly configure traps:
SNMP Agent Port: 162.
SNMP Agent Transport protocol: IP/UDP.
7.5.1 SNMPv1
ARK6 devices transmit alarm-specific traps. For every Trap Manager there is a different SNMPv1 trap definition:
alarmTrap1 TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE ssbt
VARIABLES { alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}
DESCRIPTION
"Traps definition for Trap Manager 1"
::= 0
alarmTrap2 TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE ssbt
VARIABLES { alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}
DESCRIPTION
"Traps definition for Trap Manager 2"
::= 1
alarmTrap3 TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE ssbt
VARIABLES { alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}
DESCRIPTION
"Traps definition for Trap Manager 3"
::= 2
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 188 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
VARIABLES clause defines the ordered sequence of MIB objects, belonging to the specific entry of the alTable,
which are contained within every instance of the trap type. Each variable is placed, in order, inside the variablebindings field of the SNMP Trap Message as shown in the following figure (refer to Alarms Table paragraph for
further information about alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDesc, alSeverity objects).
Figure 58.
Version 1.1
SNMPv1 Trap Messages
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 189 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.5.2 SNMPv2
ARK6 devices transmit alarm-specific traps. For every Trap Manager there is a different SNMv2 trap definition:
traps OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { snmp 3 }
alarmTraps1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS {alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION
"Traps definition for Trap Manager 1. An alarmTrap1 trap signifies that the sending
protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms
table."
::= { traps 1 }
alarmTraps2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS {alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION
"Traps definition for Trap Manager 2. An alarmTrap2 trap signifies that the sending
protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms
table."
::= { traps 2 }
alarmTraps3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE
OBJECTS {alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}
STATUS current
DESCRIPTION
"Traps definition for Trap Manager 3. An alarmTrap3 trap signifies that the sending
protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms
table."
::= { traps 3 }
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 190 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
VARIABLES clause defines the ordered sequence of MIB objects, belonging to the specific entry of the alTable,
which are contained within every instance of the trap type. Each variable is placed, in order, inside the variablebindings field of the SNMP Trap Message as shown in the following figure (refer to Alarms Table paragraph for
further information about alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDesc, alSeverity objects).
Figure 59.
Version 1.1
SNMPv2 Trap Messages
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 191 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.5.3 Configuring traps
Use Java (refer to Network and Alarms paragraphs for further information) or SNMP user interfaces to configure
traps.
The configuration of traps is performed through the setting of three different alarm masks, by means of
alTrapManager1, alTrapManager2, alTrapManager3 objects in the alTable (refer to Alarms Table paragraph),
and through the setting of the destination IP Address of the receiving management stations, by means of the
managerTrapTable in the snmp subtree in ssbtCommon MIB.
managerTrapNumber object specifies the total number of entries in the trap manager address table.
Each entry of the managerTrapTable is defined as follows:
ManagerTrapEntry ::= SEQUENCE {
managerTrapIndex INTEGER,
managerTrapIp IpAddress
managerTrapIndex is the SNMP manager index.
managerTrapIp object allows the setting of the SNMP manager IP listening address. There are up to 3 different
manager IP addresses that can be configured, one for each alTrapManager mask.
The Community shown in trap messages can be set from Java interface in the Community box within the
Network window (refer to Network paragraph).
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 192 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Appendix A.
A.1
Automatic input source selection methods
Input Autoswitch
The SDT ARK62 series supports an automatic switching control mechanism between incoming signal sources.
The ARK6 is capable of switching between inputs on the basis of primary feed quality, depending on how it is
presented to the transmitter (RF, ASI – Ethernet, SDI and CVBS feeds). The feed switching algorithm is
irrespective of payload and bitrate of both primary and reserve feeds.
The primary input is selected from the drop-down list of Input Selector. It is not allowed to dynamically change
the preferred input until the Input Autoswitch is enabled. Secondary inputs are checked in circular order,
starting from the one that follows the primary input. The numerical order is:
DVB-T - T2 - ISDB-T - ATSC
ITU
1.
ASI 1
1.
SDI 1
2.
ASI 2
2.
SDI 2
3.
ASI 3
3.
SDI 3
4.
ASI 4
4.
SDI 4
5.
Tuner 1/Tuner (if available)
5.
CVBS 1
6.
Tuner 2 (if available)
6.
CVBS 2
7.
GbE 2 ch1
8.
GbE 2 ch2
E.g. In DVB-T2 mode, if Tuner is set to priority the algorithm for selecting secondary inputs starts with GbE 2
Ethernet channels and then works down all other ASI inputs starting from ASI 1.
If the reserve feed, the one being used, does not meet anymore the necessary quality requirements, the
secondary to secondary input switch mechanism will start from the input that follows the primary input.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 193 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Input switching rules can be selected in the Alarms page through the SWITCH alarm mask and depend on the
transmission standard. Here below the available rules for each operative mode:
ITU
[ITU] No Video Input
[ITU] Input wrong standard
ATSC
[ATSC] No Input: input Transport Stream not locked
[ATSC] Input Overflow: input TS overflow
[ATSC] MH Err
[ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked: input RF signal not locked
[ATSC] FE SNR Low: RF input SNR under the alarm threshold
[ATSC] No TVCT: TVCT table not present in the selected input stream
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 194 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Feed selection and switching criteria are available via both transmitter SNMP and Java GUI interfaces.
A Finite State Machine has been used to give a description of the behaviour of the system. The FSM of the Input
Autoswitch algorithm consists of:
Four states:
1.
Priority Input Locked
2.
3.
4.
Priority Input Not Locked
Condition 1: the primary feed does not meet the necessary quality requirements as
well as reserve feeds, if any.
Condition 2: the primary feed does not meet the necessary quality requirements and
the FSM is waiting for the primary to secondary feed changeover timeout to elapse.
Searching First Locked Input
Condition 1: the primary to secondary feed changeover timeout elapsed and the FSM
is searching for a reserve feed.
Condition 2: the reserve feed, the one being used, does not meet anymore the
necessary quality requirements, the secondary to secondary input switch timeout
elapsed and FSM is searching for another reserve feed.
Checking Priority Input
Condition: the primary feed is the one being used.
Condition: the reserve input is the one being used and FSM keeps checking the priority
feed to trigger the secondary to primary changeover.
Three countdowns to N seconds, where N is defined by default in the *.def file:
1.
Primary to Secondary Switch Counter
2.
Secondary to Secondary Switch Counter
3.
It starts when the primary feed does not meet anymore the necessary quality
requirements and the system lay in waiting for the reserve feed to be checked.
It starts when the secondary feed does not meet anymore the necessary quality
requirements and the system lay in waiting for another reserve feed to be checked.
Secondary to Primary Switch Counter
It starts when the input set to priority is found to meet again the necessary quality
requirements and the system is waiting to switch back to the primary input.
Timeouts are reset when the actually used input, whether it is the preferred one or not, regain his quality
requirements.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 195 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
A.2
Seamless input switching
SDT ARK6 series supports a seamless input switching algorithm that increases the reliability of the system in a
SFN environment. The developed algorithm is capable of changing input signal source on the basis of MIP
packets within the incoming Transport Stream. The algorithm provides a reserve feed to the apparatus in a SFN
environment in the event that the primary input signal source does not meet anymore the SFN constrains. The
device is designed to manage the redundancy between two different sources in a SFN environment by seamless
switching between them
Both HP and LP streams have two different selected inputs. The two selected input are real-time analyzed under
some presence and validity rules. The inputs that are present and valid are eligible to be sent to output in
dependence on the priority rule set. If only one input is present, then is sent to output without the application of
any validity rule.
The presence of an input is evaluated under the following rules:
The input is an ASI compliant (CEI EN 80083-9) encoded signal.
The input transports an MPEG-2 TS (ITU.T 13818-1) with no Synchronization Error (as defined by ETSI
ETR 290).
The validity of an input is evaluated under the following rules:
The Transport Error flag (as defined by ITU.T 13818-1) does not rise in any packet.
The timing of reception of each input packet is inside the standard boundaries (as defined by ETSI ETR
290).
The SFN adaptation of the input TS is guaranteed by the presence of a correct MIP (as defined by ETSI
TR 101 191), guaranteed by a CRC32 algorithm checking.
The TS data validity is guaranteed by the presence of PAT (as defined by ETSI EN 300 468) correct after a
CRC32 algorithm checking.
The TS data validity is guaranteed by the presence of PMT (as defined by ETSI EN 300 468) correct after
a CRC32 algorithm checking.
The total delay applied by the distribution network to the input signal is not higher than the Max Delay
set by the SFN adapter.
The time window available to deliver the TS to the output is higher than the network margin applied.
When the used input check fails, the device seamlessly switches to the secondary input if present and valid,
otherwise it continue to output the same flow despite of the validity rules check.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 196 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Appendix B.
Java Virtual Machine
The Java interface requires a host computer connected via Ethernet to the board with the proper Java Machine
version installed.
Ethernet connection
B.1
The host computer has to be connected via Ethernet to the board.
Direct or crossed UTP category 6 cable is recommended.
NOTE: for best performances, a fast connection (i.e. gigabit Ethernet) is required. After careful testing it was
found that a slow connection makes it difficult the use of precorrection tools.
B.1.1
Configuration
In order to connect to the board trough a LAN, all the devices have to be on the same network.
The default IP address settings of the X-port are:
IP address: 10.77.xx.xx , where xx is the host address unique for each board.
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0.
Remember to change these settings if they are not compatible with the LAN where the computer and the board
are connected.
IP address and network parameters can be changed only using the local interface. Please refer to chapter 6 for
the network setting commands.
B.2
Java(TM) Platform
B.2.1
Download
The Java Interface works with any Sun Java Virtual Machine after the 1.4.1 version.
If the computer has no Java Virtual Machine installed, the recommended 1.5.0 version can be downloaded from
the Sun Server trough this link:
http://www.java.com/
B.2.2
Java Control Panel
Java caching must be disabled.
B.3
Supported Web Browsers
The Java GUI is designed to support every Web Browser that uses Sun Java Virtual Machine from 1.4.1 and
newer.
Here’s a list of Web Browsers where Java GUI has been tested and troubleshot: Microsoft Internet Explorer,
version 5 and newer. Mozilla Firefox, version 1.5 and newer.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 197 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Appendix C.
Application Note
Screenshots of this application note are used as an example and the shown file names are not related to ARK6T2 device.
C.1
How to update
1.
Launch the Java installer.
Figure 60.
2.
Insert the IRRM2 BTS Remux IP address into the numeric field.
Figure 61.
Version 1.1
Java installer
Java installer – IP address insertion
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 198 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
3.
Click the Search button.
Figure 62.
4.
Select the device version you want to load.
Figure 63.
Version 1.1
Java Installer – Search button
Java Installer - Device selection
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 199 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
5.
Click on the “Load” button.
Figure 64.
6.
If you want to update only some software versions, click on the check boxes corresponding to the
software version you want to load, otherwise click on the check box corresponding to the Load All
option. Click on the “Enter” button to start the loading.
Figure 65.
Version 1.1
Java Installer – Load button
Java Installer – Software versions selection
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 200 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
7.
Once started the loading, the “Stop” button lights up. Click on this button to interrupt the
programming.
Figure 66.
8.
When the loading is complete, the pop-up window “Operation Successfully Completed” appears. Click
on the “OK” button.
Figure 67.
Version 1.1
Java Installer – Stop button
Java Installer – Operation Successfully Completed
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 201 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
9.
To save a copy of the file system click on “Backup” button. A pop-up window “Salva” appears. Specify
the saving path, then click on “Salva” button.
Figure 68.
Version 1.1
Java Installer – Backup Save button
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 202 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Appendix D.
Document versions
Table 33.
Version
Author
Revised by
Document Versions
Date
Note
1.0
Di Biase
November 8th, 2011
First version with all the
operative modes.
1.1
Di Biase
November 23rd, 2011
Updated paragraphs 4.2 and
4.4.
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 203 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
List of Tables
Table 1.
Hardware options .................................................................................................................... 8
Table 2.
RS232 DE-9 pinout ................................................................................................................. 23
Table 3.
TLC pinout.............................................................................................................................. 23
Table 4.
TLS pinout .............................................................................................................................. 24
Table 5.
Input window ........................................................................................................................ 33
Table 6.
Tuner window: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 38
Table 7.
CVBS Inputs: Statistics ........................................................................................................... 40
Table 8.
ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters .......................................................... 42
Table 9.
ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings............................................................................................. 46
Table 10.
ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation....................................................................................... 50
Table 11.
ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 53
Table 12.
ITU Processing: ITU Settings .................................................................................................. 56
Table 13.
ITU Modulation: Modulator manager ................................................................................... 61
Table 14.
ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes ............................................................................... 64
Table 15.
Adaptive Linear Precorrection: Management panel ............................................................. 72
Table 16.
Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: Management panel ..................................................... 75
Table 17.
Output window...................................................................................................................... 77
Table 18.
Output window: Reflex Pwr Management ............................................................................ 86
Table 19.
Network window ................................................................................................................... 88
Table 20.
GPS window ........................................................................................................................... 93
Table 21.
GPS window: Holdover Management ................................................................................... 96
Table 22.
Alarms window .................................................................................................................... 100
Table 23.
Events descriptions list ........................................................................................................ 117
Table 24. Alarms descriptions list ....................................................................................................... 121
Table 25.
Task error event specific data ............................................................................................. 126
Table 26.
Init system event specific data ............................................................................................ 128
Table 27.
Local User Interface: Idle Menu .......................................................................................... 140
Table 28.
Local User Interface: submenus descriptions ..................................................................... 141
Table 29.
Alarms descriptions list ....................................................................................................... 142
Table 30.
ARK6 SNMP Tree Structure ................................................................................................. 148
Table 31.
Alarms Code and Description .............................................................................................. 183
Table 32.
Alarm Thresholds Description ............................................................................................. 186
Table 33.
Document Versions ............................................................................................................. 203
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 204 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
List of Figures
Figure 1.
DE-9 Male connector ............................................................................................................. 23
Figure 2.
TLC connector ........................................................................................................................ 23
Figure 3.
TLS connector ........................................................................................................................ 24
Figure 4.
GUI - Login ............................................................................................................................. 28
Figure 5.
Java menu bar ....................................................................................................................... 29
Figure 6.
System commands bar .......................................................................................................... 29
Figure 7.
Operation pages bar .............................................................................................................. 30
Figure 8.
System menu ......................................................................................................................... 30
Figure 9.
Home Page window............................................................................................................... 31
Figure 10. ATSC / DVB-T/T2 Input window ............................................................................................ 32
Figure 11. Front-End window ................................................................................................................. 37
Figure 12. Tuner window: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 38
Figure 13. CVBS Inputs: Statistics ........................................................................................................... 39
Figure 14. ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters .......................................................... 41
Figure 15. ATSC window ......................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 16. ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings............................................................................................. 45
Figure 17. ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation....................................................................................... 49
Figure 18. ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation....................................................................................... 51
Figure 19. ATSC TVCT: Add button ......................................................................................................... 51
Figure 20. ATSC Processing: ATSC Measure ........................................................................................... 52
Figure 21. ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 53
Figure 22. ITU window............................................................................................................................ 54
Figure 23. ITU Processing: ITU Settings .................................................................................................. 55
Figure 24. ITU Processing page: ITU Modulation ................................................................................... 59
Figure 25. ITU Modulation: Modulator manager ................................................................................... 60
Figure 26. ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes ............................................................................... 63
Figure 27. Adaptive Linear Precorrection............................................................................................... 66
Figure 28. AM/PM Precorrection ........................................................................................................... 68
Figure 29. Realizing connection.............................................................................................................. 69
Figure 30. Adaptive Linear Precorrection............................................................................................... 70
Figure 31. Adaptive Filter ....................................................................................................................... 71
Figure 32. Filter window: complex filter coefficients graph................................................................... 73
Figure 33. Filter window: module graph ................................................................................................ 73
Figure 34. Filter window: phase graph ................................................................................................... 73
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 205 of 206
ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1
Figure 35. Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection ....................................................................................... 74
Figure 36. Output window...................................................................................................................... 76
Figure 37. Reflex Pwr Management ....................................................................................................... 85
Figure 38. Network window ................................................................................................................... 87
Figure 39. GPS window ........................................................................................................................... 92
Figure 40. Holdover Management ......................................................................................................... 94
Figure 41. Alarms window ...................................................................................................................... 99
Figure 42. Events window .................................................................................................................... 116
Figure 43. Time and date setting .......................................................................................................... 126
Figure 44. Menu bar ............................................................................................................................. 131
Figure 45. File menu ............................................................................................................................. 131
Figure 46. View menu........................................................................................................................... 132
Figure 47. Time window ....................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 48. Alerts window...................................................................................................................... 133
Figure 49. Alert message ...................................................................................................................... 134
Figure 50. Help menu ........................................................................................................................... 135
Figure 51. About window ..................................................................................................................... 135
Figure 52. Info window: Serial Numbers .............................................................................................. 136
Figure 53. Info window: Server File System Content ........................................................................... 136
Figure 54. Info window: Client System Parameters ............................................................................. 136
Figure 55. Download Software Standalone .......................................................................................... 137
Figure 56. SNMP Protocol Preferences ................................................................................................ 145
Figure 57. ARK6 Tree Structure ............................................................................................................ 146
Figure 58. SNMPv1 Trap Messages ...................................................................................................... 189
Figure 59. SNMPv2 Trap Messages ...................................................................................................... 191
Figure 60. Java installer ........................................................................................................................ 198
Figure 61. Java installer – IP address insertion .................................................................................... 198
Figure 62. Java Installer – Search button ............................................................................................. 199
Figure 63. Java Installer - Device selection ........................................................................................... 199
Figure 64. Java Installer – Load button ................................................................................................ 200
Figure 65. Java Installer – Software versions selection ........................................................................ 200
Figure 66. Java Installer – Stop button ................................................................................................. 201
Figure 67. Java Installer – Operation Successfully Completed ............................................................. 201
Figure 68. Java Installer – Backup Save button .................................................................................... 202
Version 1.1
SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC
Page 206 of 206
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : No Page Count : 206 Language : en-US Tagged PDF : Yes Title : Software User Manual Author : C. Di Biase Subject : ARK6 Creator : Microsoft® Office Word 2007 Create Date : 2012:03:21 14:18:09-04:00 Modify Date : 2012:03:21 14:18:09-04:00 Producer : Microsoft® Office Word 2007EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools